JP6802211B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

As a game machine, there is one that displays characters in a plurality of, for example, two display areas set in a liquid crystal display device or the like, and executes an effect in which these characters are pressed against each other (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In this type of gaming machine, for example, a character on the ally side and a character on the enemy side are displayed in their respective display areas, and the characters of both the enemy and the ally are pressed against each other across the boundary line of each display area. To do.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-43447

However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, even if the enemy and ally characters are pressed against each other, the display area in which the ally side character is displayed and the display area in which the enemy side character is displayed are displayed. The boundary line between and was not changed. For this reason, it was difficult to improve the interest.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest.

(A) A gaming machine that can play a game and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
The first display area and
The second display area and
A third display area between the first display area and the second display area,
A suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting an expectation degree controlled in the advantageous state by displaying in each of the first display area and the second display area.
A changing means capable of changing the ratio of the area of the first display area and the area of the second display area is provided.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the third display area is controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the plurality of display modes is the display mode.
The changing means differs in the ratio of the area of the first display area and the area of the second display area depending on which of the plurality of display modes the display mode of the third display region is. Change to ratio,
The suggestion effect execution means
In the first display area, the first suggestion display of any one of a plurality of types of display modes is performed.
In the second display area, a second suggestion display of one of a plurality of types of display modes is performed.
The advantageous state depends on which of the plurality of types of the display mode of the first suggestion display is, and which of the plurality of types of the display mode of the second suggestion display is. The degree of expectation controlled by is different,
After the first suggestion display is performed in the first display area, the second suggestion display is performed in the second display area.
The display mode of the third display area changes to a display mode corresponding to the second suggestion display.
further,
A display means that can be displaced into multiple states and can display an image,
A specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect that maintains the state of the display means is provided.
As the specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect in which the period for maintaining the display means in the first state and the period for maintaining the display means in the second state are different.
The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the length of the period for maintaining the second state.
It is characterized by that.
(B) In the gaming machine of (A), the suggestion effect executing means performs the first suggestion display of any one of a plurality of types of display modes in the first display area, and the second suggestion display is performed. The second suggestion display of any one of the plurality of types of display modes is performed in the display area, and which of the plurality of types of display modes is the display mode of the first suggestion display is determined by the second suggestion mode. After the first suggestion display is performed in the first display area, the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the plurality of types of the suggestion display display mode is. The second suggestion display may be performed in the second display area, and the display mode of the third display area may be changed to a display mode corresponding to the second suggestion display.
(1) The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), and has a first display area (for example, a first display area AE1 or the like) and a second display area. A display area (for example, a second display area AE2 or the like), a third display area between the first display area and the second display area (for example, a third display area AE3 or the like), and the first display area. And the suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation by displaying in each of the second display area (for example, the enemy character EC and the ally character MC are displayed in each of the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2. A suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 or the like) for executing a step-up advance notice effect suggesting a jackpot expectation is provided, and when the suggestion effect is executed, the third display is provided. The degree of expectation differs depending on which of the plurality of types of display modes the area is displayed (for example, the decorative character "super heat!" Is displayed in the third display area AE3, and the first A big hit depending on the case of shifting to the third stage (SU3) of the pattern and the case of shifting to the third stage (SU3) of the second pattern when the decorative character "pinch !?" is displayed in the third display area AE3. (The degree of expectation is different, etc.), and further, a specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect that maintains the mode of the effect (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 that can execute a specific effect that maintains the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051). As the specific effect, a period for maintaining the first aspect (a period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the vertical direction) and a period for maintaining the second aspect (a period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the horizontal direction). It is possible to execute different effects, and the degree of expectation differs depending on the length of the period for maintaining the second aspect (for example, when the specific effect is executed, the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways. The longer the time is, the higher the expectation of a big hit, etc.).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to pay attention to the period during which the mode of production is maintained.

(2) In the game machine of the above (1), as the suggestion effect, one of a plurality of different types of characters is displayed for the first display area and the second display area (for example, the first display). One of a plurality of types of enemy characters, "normal character", "chance character", and "large chance character", is displayed in the area AE1, and one of the first ally characters MC1 and the first ally in the second display area AE2. Display one of two characters MC1 and the second ally character MC2, or a plurality of three types of the first ally character MC1, the second ally character MC2, and the third ally character MC3 as the ally character MC, etc.) It may be.

According to the above configuration, the interest is improved by increasing the combination of the display contents of the first area and the second area.

(3) In the game machine according to (1) or (2), when the display is performed in each of the first display area and the second display area, the notification effect is executed (for example, the first display area). When the enemy character is displayed on the AE1, the speaker 8 outputs the first notification sound, and when the first ally character MC1 is displayed on the second display area AE2, the speaker 8 outputs the second notification sound different from the first notification sound. It may be output (etc.).

According to the above configuration, the player can recognize that the display is displayed, and the interest is improved.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above, when the mode of the third display area changes, it is possible to notify the change (for example, decorative characters in the third display area AE3). It is possible to output a notification sound from the speaker 8 when displaying the above (for example, it is possible to output a notification sound), and the mode of notification differs depending on the mode after the change of the third display area (for example, the third display). The third notification sound output from the speaker 8 when the decorative character in the area AE3 is changed from "chance !?" to "super heat!", And the speaker 8 when it is "pinch !?" The fourth notification sound output from is different, etc.).

According to the above configuration, the player can recognize which mode has been changed by the notification.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4), the first display area and the second display area are formed by the movement of the accessory (for example, the movable frame member 60 or the like). (For example, when the movable frame member 60 moves from the first position P11 to the second position P12, the display area of the image display device 5 is divided by the movable frame member 6, and the first display area AE1 and the second display are displayed. Region AE2 may be formed, etc.).

According to the above configuration, the interest is improved.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5), the area of the first display area and the second display area can be changed (for example, by moving the movable frame member 60 up and down). The area of the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2 can be changed, etc.), and the ratio of the area according to the change of the third display area (for example, the vertical movement of the movable frame member 60, etc.). May be different.

According to the above configuration, the degree of attention of each display area can be increased.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6), the third display area moves according to the movement of the accessory (for example, the third display area AE3 moves up and down of the movable frame member 60. It may move according to the movement operation in the direction, etc.).

According to the above configuration, the interest is improved.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following (8) to (13). Conventionally, in a game machine, there has been a game machine capable of performing an effect that maintains the mode of the effect, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117576. However, although the conventional gaming machine described above makes it possible to execute an effect that maintains the aspect of the effect, it is not possible to pay attention to the period during which the aspect of the effect is maintained. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine that can pay attention to the period during which the mode of production is maintained.

(8) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is specified to maintain the aspect of the effect. A period (secondary) for maintaining the first aspect as the specific effect, provided with a specific effect means capable of executing the effect (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing the specific effect that maintains the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051). It is possible to perform different effects between the period for maintaining the image display device 9051 in the vertical orientation and the period for maintaining the second aspect (the period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the horizontal orientation), and the second aspect is maintained. The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the length of the period (for example, the longer the time that the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways when the specific effect is executed, the higher the expectation of big hit. Is high, etc.).

According to this configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the period during which the mode of production is maintained.

(9) In the game machine of the above (8), the expectation that the second aspect is maintained is higher than the case where the first aspect is maintained. Other effects are likely to be executed (for example, even if the count-up notice effect has the same number of counts by a predetermined character, it is executed when the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways. The jackpot expectation of the count-up notice effect is higher than the jackpot expectation of the count-up notice effect that is executed when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in portrait orientation without executing the specific effect), You may do so.

According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the specific effect is controlled in an advantageous state by executing the other effect while the mode of the specific effect is maintained in the second aspect.

(10) In the gaming machine according to the above (8) or (9), a notification effect means (for example, a sub-image display device 9051) capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the mode of the specific effect has become the second aspect. It may be further provided with an effect control CPU 90120 or the like capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the image is turned sideways.

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the mode of the specific effect has become the second mode.

(11) In any of the game machines (8) to (10), as the specific effect, an effect that gradually changes from the first aspect to the second aspect in response to a plurality of variable displays. (For example, the pending change effect execution patterns HP4'-1 to HP4'-2, HP5'-1 to HP5'-2, HP6'-1 to HP6'-2, HP7'-shown in FIG. 41. 1 to HP7'-2, etc.).

According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest over a plurality of variable displays.

(12) In any of the game machines (8) to (11) above, a predetermined effect means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing a call advance notice effect) capable of executing a predetermined effect of a plurality of modes is further provided. The ratio of the specific effect mode to the second mode differs depending on which mode of the predetermined effect is executed (for example, when the call advance notice effect is executed, the call of the predetermined character is performed. When is "I don't want to do it", a specific effect is executed, and there is a high possibility that the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways, etc.).

According to this configuration, attention can be paid to a predetermined effect.

(13) In any of the game machines (8) to (12), during one variable display, the effect of changing from the first aspect to the second aspect and then changing to the first aspect is performed a plurality of times. It is feasible (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, the effect of rotating the sub-image display device 9051 from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction and then rotating it vertically is executed a plurality of times during one variable display. Things, etc.), you may do so.

According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in one variable display.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination example of the special figure display result and the like. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the step-up notice effect decision process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the step-up notice effect content determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the enemy (ally) character determination table at the time of super reach. It is a figure which shows the example of the operation of a frame accessory and the display operation in the display area of an image display device. It is a figure which shows the example of the operation following FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the operation following FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the operation following FIG. It is a figure which shows the operation of a frame accessory and another example of the display operation in the display area of an image display device. It is a figure which shows still another example of the operation of a frame accessory and the display operation in the display area of an image display device. It is a figure which shows still another example of the operation of a frame accessory and the display operation in the display area of an image display device. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows an example of various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the main production control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special figure hold storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special figure display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the jackpot type determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table for a big hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table for loss. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the processing content executed in the command analysis processing. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the command buffer at the time of a start winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of hold change effect setting processing. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of the hold change effect. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of an action effect. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the hold change effect execution pattern. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the hold change effect execution pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of the call notice effect. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of the count-up notice effect. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of a specific effect. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the specific effect execution pattern. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the pseudo continuous production execution pattern. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the count-up notice effect execution pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution decision example of the production at the time of development. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect screen.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board 2 that constitutes a game board surface and a gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device into this game area.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2. Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, and in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game, a plurality of types that can be identified from each other. The special symbol, which is the identification information of the LED, is displayed in a variable manner. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do.

The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns having different combinations of those to be turned on and those to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be preset as a plurality of types of special symbols. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". ..

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effects images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game are supported. In a decorative symbol display area that is a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, one of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is started. Fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 5 are displayed. , The finalized decorative symbol, which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each are variably displayed, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. In addition, to derive and display various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means to stop and display the identification information such as the decorative symbol and end the variable display. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol becomes "0" and the decoration is displayed. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking, expansion and contraction, for example. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitively displayed, the player can recognize that the change of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. It should be noted that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

A left start winning memory display area 5HL and a right starting winning memory display area 5HR are arranged at the left and right positions on the screen of the image display device 5, respectively. In the start winning prize storage display areas 5HL and 5HR, a hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the number of hold of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. Here, in the hold of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. It occurs based on the starting prize by doing. That is, although the start conditions for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative symbol are satisfied, the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed and the pachinko game machine 1 is When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the control of the jackpot game state or the like, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended.

For example, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first start prize in which the game ball passes through the first start winning opening, the first 1 If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, the number of stored first special figures is added by 1, and the first special figure is used. The execution of the special figure game that was there is suspended. In addition, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second start prize in which the game ball passes through the second start winning opening, the first 2 If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, the number of the second special figure reserved storage is added by 1, and the second special figure is used. The execution of the special figure game that was there is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the number of stored special figures of the first special figure is subtracted by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. At that time, the number of the second special figure reserved storage is subtracted by 1. The hold memory display for identifiablely displaying the number of pending variable displays due to winning in the first starting winning opening is performed in the left starting winning memory display area 5HL, and the number of holdings for variable display due to winning in the second starting winning opening. The hold storage display for identifiable display is performed in the right start winning memory display area 5HR.

The variable display hold storage number obtained by adding the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number is also particularly referred to as a total hold storage number. The term "special figure reserved memory" usually refers to a concept including all of the first special figure reserved memory, the second special figure reserved memory, and the total reserved memory, but in particular, it refers to a part of these. It shall be possible.

A display for displaying the number of reserved special figures may be provided together with the start winning memory display areas 5HL and 5HR, or in place of the starting winning memory display areas 5HL and 5HR. In the example shown in FIG. 1, in addition to the start winning prize storage display areas 5HL and 5HR, the number of special symbol reserved storages is identifiablely displayed on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A 1-hold display 25A and a 2nd hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of hold storages of the first special figure in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable.
The first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are configured to include, for example, a number of LEDs corresponding to the upper limit values of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number, respectively. ..

A movable frame member 60 is provided in the vicinity of the lower position in the display area of the image display device 5. The movable frame member 60 moves up and down relative to the image display device 5 by the vertical movement drive by the movable frame member motor 61 shown in FIG. An opening 62 is formed in the movable frame member 60. The movable frame member 60 is arranged on the surface side (player side) of the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 is visible through the opening 62 of the movable frame member 60. Therefore, the display area of the image display device 5 is formed on the portion surrounded by the movable frame member 60 (hereinafter referred to as “inside the movable frame member 60”) and on the outside of the movable frame member 60. Further, the length of the movable frame member 60 in the width direction is longer than the length of the image display device 5 in the width direction. Therefore, when the movable frame member 60 is arranged at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the image display device 5, for example, a central position in the vertical direction of the image display device 6, it is movable in addition to the display area formed in the movable frame member 60. The display area of the image display device 5 is divided by the frame member 60 to form upper and lower display areas of the image frame member 60.

When the movable frame member 60 is located at the lowermost position, the display area of the image display device 5 is not formed below the movable frame member 60, and the display area of the image display device 5 is formed inside and above the movable frame member 60. It is formed. Further, when the movable frame member 60 is located at the uppermost position, the display area of the image display device 5 is not formed above the movable frame member 60, and the image display device 5 is displayed inside and below the movable frame member 60. A region is formed. Further, the display areas of the image display device 5 are not formed on the left and right sides of the movable frame member 60. Hereinafter, the lowermost position where the movable frame member 60 is movable is referred to as a first position, and the uppermost position is referred to as a third position. The intermediate position between the first position and the third position is referred to as the second position. Further, the display area above the movable frame member 60 in the image display device 5 when the movable frame member 60 is in the second position is referred to as a first display area, and an image when the movable frame member 60 is in the second position. The display area below the movable frame member 60 in the display device 5 is referred to as a second display area. Further, the display area inside the movable frame member 60 is referred to as a third display area. By moving the movable frame member 60 up and down, the third display area moves, and the areas of the first display area and the second display area can be changed. Also. When the movable frame member 60 is in the second position, the areas of the first display area and the second display area are substantially the same. Further, the ratio of the area of the first display area and the area of the second display area differs depending on the position of the movable frame member 60 in the vertical direction.

Below the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed to a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. To form a second start winning opening.

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening. It becomes. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball enters the second starting winning opening. It becomes a state. Although the normally variable winning ball device 6B allows the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening even when it is in the closed state, the possibility that the game ball will enter is lower than when it is in the open state. It may be configured as follows. As described above, the game area is provided with a normal variable winning ball device 6B that changes between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. If a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A and the number of stored first special figures is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit value, the first start is performed. The condition is met. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the number of the second special figure reserved memory is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit value, the second start is performed. The condition is met.

The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may directly pay out the game balls to be prize balls, or may give points corresponding to the number of game balls to be prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening as.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening, and the game ball cannot pass through the large winning opening. .. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball easily passes through the large winning opening. To do. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through the large winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the large winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed through the winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out. Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is a first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed or partially closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to pass the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball, and the game It becomes a second state that is disadvantageous to the person.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2. As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol that is is displayed in a variable manner. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is called a normal symbol game. A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball, and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be done. In this case, a predetermined number of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings are detected by the predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 are provided around the game area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward a game area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation by the player or the like.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. A plate is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided to hold the surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, and a lamp control board 14, as shown in FIG. 2, for example. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 or the like for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, a touch sensor board, and the like are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12 or the like. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls the lighting / extinguishing of the LEDs and the like constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It also has a function to control the variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / color development of the normal symbol display 20. ing.

For example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted on the main board 11. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting the game ball and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the winning door.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives an image display device 5, speakers 8L, and 8R. , And various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electric parts such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 includes all or part of the display operation of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or one of the lighting / extinguishing operations of the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, and the like. It has a function of determining the control content for causing an electric component for effect such as a unit to execute a predetermined effect operation.

The audio control board 13 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs audio from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing for this purpose. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for controlling lamp output provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is a game effect lamp 9, a decorative LED, or the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit that drives the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

As shown in FIG. 2, wirings for transmitting detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch, and a count switch 23 are connected to the main board 11. The various switches may have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a switch called a sensor. Further, a wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display 20, and the like is connected to the main board 11.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. It includes lamp control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. Each of these effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, in which the first byte represents MODE and the second byte represents EXT. The first bit of the MODE data may be set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data may be set to "0" in advance.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 101 that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a RAM 102 that provides a work area for game control. It is configured to include a CPU 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103, and an I / O 105.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. And transmission operations that output various signals are also performed.

The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may have at least a RAM 102 built in in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, a random number circuit 104 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game. Random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as a random number circuit 104, or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. You may. For example, numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is stored in a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 102, and the CPU 103 The random value may be updated by updating the stored value periodically or irregularly.

In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 is configured with table data that constitutes a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals that are various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data to be used is stored. In the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily stored in a rewritable manner.

The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. The display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in 5, the random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed.

As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing the process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variation data to the RAM 122, and the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the variation data in the RAM 122. A variable data read operation for reading various temporarily stored variable data, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and an effect control CPU 120 is I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the O125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 120, ROM 121, and RAM 122 may be included in the one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5 and wiring for transmitting an effect sound signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the voice control board 13. A wiring or the like for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Further, the effect control board 12 is also connected to a wiring for transmitting a predetermined drive command signal to the motor drive circuit 16 for driving the movable frame member motor 61 for operating the movable frame member 60. ..

In the effect control board 12, for example, a random number circuit 124 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation. The random number used to control such an effect operation is also called an effect random number.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 contains a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. Various data used for controlling the effect operation are stored in the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12.

The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command or the like from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 controls for executing variable display of decorative patterns and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with a VDP, a CGROM, a VRAM, an LCD drive circuit, or the like. The VDP may be a GPU, GCL, or a microprocessor for image processing generally referred to as DSP. The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It may be configured.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 has, for example, an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. And are included. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command transmitted to the audio control board 13, a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14, and the like are output. ..

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game is performed using a game ball as a game medium, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a launch motor included in a predetermined ball launcher is provided based on a predetermined operation of a ball striking operation handle installed at the lower right of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, a game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes through the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, the first starting is started because the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The condition is satisfied. After that, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A starts. Will be done.

Further, when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. To do. After that, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B starts. Will be done. However, when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state as the second state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning opening.

Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2, the normal symbol start condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is established. After that, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started based on the establishment of the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended. In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed. At this time, if a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol loss". In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per normal figure", the opening control is performed so that the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilt position, and the predetermined time is set. After that, the closing control to return to the vertical position is performed.

When the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, or when the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, it is special. Whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the effect control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. Is transmitted from to the effect control board 12.

After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived. Is displayed. "Left", "middle", and "right" decorations arranged in the display area of the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a variable display of a decorative symbol different from the special symbol is performed.

In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, the definite special that results in the variable display of the special symbol. When the symbol is derived and displayed, the image display device 5 derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol. When a predetermined big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the special symbol, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and is controlled to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. As a variable display result of the special symbol, when the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed and the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is "missing".

As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers "3" and "7" is used as a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is used as a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, the special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol. Further, the special symbol of the lighting pattern having a specific meaning as a number or a symbol is not limited to the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol. For example, the special symbol of the arbitrary lighting pattern in the 7-segment LED can be the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol. May be.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the first state which is advantageous for the player. Then, a round game is executed in which the large winning opening is continuously opened during a predetermined period or a period until a predetermined number of game balls enter the large winning opening and a winning ball is generated. During the period other than the execution period of such a round game, the large winning opening is closed, and the winning ball is difficult or impossible to be generated. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball each time the winning ball is detected. The round game in the jackpot game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit is reached.

When the special figure display result is "big hit", the case where the big hit type is either "non-probable change" or "probable change" is included. For example, as a variable display result of a special symbol, when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "3" is derived and displayed, the jackpot type is "non-probability", and when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "7" is derived and displayed, the jackpot is displayed. The type is "probability change". When the jackpot type is "non-probability change" or "probability variation", the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 as the first state advantageous to the player as a round game in the jackpot game state is relatively long. A normal open round is performed, which is the time. As a round game in the big hit game state, a big hit type may be provided in which a short-term open round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 in the first state is relatively short is executed. The jackpot game state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as the first specific game state. The jackpot game state in which the short-term open round is executed is also referred to as the second specific game state.

After the jackpot game state ends, the probability of the variable display result becoming a "big hit" may be controlled to a probability variation state higher than the normal state based on the establishment of a predetermined probability variation control condition. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times or the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied. Further, after the jackpot game state is completed, the average variable display time may be controlled to a shorter time state than the normal state. The time saving state is controlled so as to continue until one of the time saving end condition of either the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times or the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. .. As an example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", the gaming state becomes the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability change", the game state becomes the probability change state after the jackpot game state ends.

In the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is changed into the first state and the second state in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes through the second starting winning opening as compared with the normal state. For example, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol" in each normal symbol game. The tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is "per normal figure" is set to be longer than in the normal state. The normal variable winning ball device 6B may be changed to the first state and the second state in an advantageous change mode by the control of lengthening the length and the control of increasing the number of tilts as compared with the normal state. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball device 6B into the first state and the second state in the advantageous change mode is called high opening control. By being controlled to such a probabilistic state or a time saving state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened, and the special gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

The game balls used as a game medium in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recorded information of the scores given according to the number of the balls may have valuable value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity, for example. Just do it. Alternatively, the recorded information of these game balls and scores may have valuable value that can be used for another game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, although it cannot be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize.

In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is used. , Of the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the start of any special symbol game. Then, in the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode.

Here, the reach mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 form a part of the jackpot combination, the decorative symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continue to change. It is a display mode in which all or a part of the decorative symbols are changed in synchronization while forming all or a part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", when the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed. In the remaining decorative symbol display area that is not stopped, the decorative symbol is fluctuating, or all or part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". This is a display mode in which the decorative symbols are changed in synchronization while forming all or a part of the jackpot combination.

Further, in response to the reach mode, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, a character image different from the decorative symbol is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the display mode of the background image is changed. By causing the display, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, an effect operation different from that before the reach mode may be executed. Such an effect operation such as a change in the display mode of the character image, a change in the display mode of the background image, a reproduction display of the moving image, and a change in the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is called a reach effect display. In the reach effect, not only the display operation on the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation on the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are the operation modes before the reach mode is reached. It may be included that the operation mode is different from that of the above.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns having different operation modes may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" differs depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, reach effects such as normal, super A, and super B are preset. Then, when the reach production of super reach such as Super A or Super B (hereinafter referred to as "super reach production") is executed, compared with the case where the normal reach production (hereinafter referred to as "normal reach production") is executed. , There is a high possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit". In addition, among the super reach productions, when a specific reach production such as a super reach production of Super B (hereinafter referred to as "Super Reach B production") is executed, a super reach production of Super A (hereinafter referred to as "Super Reach A production") is executed. Compared to the case where "directing") is executed, the expectation of a big hit is higher.

The jackpot expectation is, for example, (probability that the effect is executed at the time of a jackpot) x (probability of being a jackpot) / {(probability that the effect is executed at the time of a jackpot) x (probability of being a jackpot) + (other than at the time of a jackpot) It is calculated by (probability that the effect is executed) x (probability that it does not become a big hit)}.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, an image display or voice output as a message, a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED is lit. Due to an effect operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative symbol, for example, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be the reach mode, the variable display result may be a "big hit", and the like. A notice effect for notifying the player in advance of the advantage of the game executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be executed.

The effect operation that becomes the advance notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Is executed before the reach mode is reached. Further, the advance notice effect for notifying that the variable display result may be a "big hit" may include one executed after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode. In this way, the notice effect can be in the big hit game state at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol or the confirmed decorative symbol that is the variable display result. Anything that can foretell sex will do. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance according to the content of the effect operation when the notice effect is executed. The effect operation serving as the advance notice effect may be such that the variable display time of the special symbol does not change depending on whether or not it is executed.

In this embodiment, the step-up notice effect is set to be feasible. The step-up notice effect is an effect that is executed as an effect that encourages the development of the reach effect when the reach effect is not executed in the period until the start when the reach effect is executed. In this embodiment, when the step-up notice effect is executed, the higher the step-up stage, the higher the possibility of developing into the reach effect and the super reach effect, and further, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In this embodiment, as an example, the step-up notice effect can be stepped up in three stages of the first stage (SU1), the second stage (SU2), and the third stage (SU3). .. In addition, it is possible to execute a sign effect that fuels the start of the step-up notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 13B, the predictive effect is an effect in which the movable frame member 60 slightly moves up and down at the first position P11. In the first stage of the step-up notice effect, as shown in FIG. 14A, the movable frame member 60 moves from the first position P11 to the second position P12, and the enemy character EC is displayed in the first display area AE1. It is a stage. In the second stage of the step-up notice effect, the movable frame member 60 moves to the second position P12, the enemy character EC is displayed in the first display area AE1, and then the ally character MC is displayed in the second display area AE2. It is in a state. There are two patterns in the third stage of the step-up notice production. As shown in FIG. 15 (A-1), the first pattern of the third stage of the step-up notice effect is the image display device 5 after the movable frame member 60 has moved from the second position P12 to the third position P13. An enlarged second display area ED2 is formed below the movable frame member 60, and the ally character MC is displayed in a large size in the enlarged second display area ED2. In the second pattern of the third stage of the step-up notice effect, as shown in FIG. 15 (A-2), after the movable frame member 60 moves from the second position P12 to the first position P11, the image display device 5 is used. This is a pattern in which the enlarged first display area ED1 is formed above the movable frame member 60, and the enemy character EC is largely displayed in the enlarged first display area ED1.

As the stage of the step-up notice effect progresses, the effect characters and the like are displayed in the third display area each time. Further, as the stage of the step-up notice effect progresses, the speaker 8 (8L, 8R) outputs a notification sound notifying that the stage has progressed. The notification sound is different depending on the advanced stage, but may be the same sound.

After the step-up notice production is completed, it may or may not develop into a reach production. In the case of developing into the reach effect, when the reach effect is developed from the first stage and the second stage, the movable frame member 60 develops into the reach effect after moving from the second position P12 to the first position P11. When the reach effect is started, if the first pattern of the third stage develops into the reach effect, after the movable frame member 60 moves to the third position P13, as shown in FIG. 15 (B-1). In the enlarged second display area ED2 of, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in the reach mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”. After the variable display mode of the decorative symbol of the reach mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (C-1), the variable display mode is displayed small in the lower left of the enlarged second display area ED2, and a predetermined effect, For example, it develops into a battle production in which the enemy character EC and the ally character MC (first ally character MC1) confront each other. In the battle effect, when the display result of the special symbol is "big hit", the effect that the ally character MC wins is executed, and when the display result of the special symbol is "miss", the effect that the enemy character EC wins is executed. Will be done.

When the reach effect is started, if the second pattern of the third stage develops into the reach effect, after the movable frame member 60 moves to the first position P11 as shown in FIG. 15 (B-2). In the enlarged first display area ED1, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in the reach mode is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”. After the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in the reach mode is displayed, the variable display mode is displayed small in the lower left of the enlarged first display area ED1 as shown in FIG. 15 (C-2), and a predetermined effect ( For example, battle production). In addition, when developing into the reach effect, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol of the reach mode is not displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right", and the predetermined mode is determined. It may be developed into a production (for example, a battle production).

When the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, becomes a "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. As an example, when the jackpot type is "non-probable change" or "probable change", it is the same on the predetermined effective line in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". When the decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed, the fixed decorative symbols that are a big hit combination may be derived and displayed.

When the special symbol display result is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach mode, and the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined non-reach combination are stopped and displayed, so that the non-specific display result is obtained. The definite decorative design may be derived and displayed. In addition, when the special symbol display result is "missing", the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined reach combination are stopped and displayed after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, so that the non-specific display is performed. The resulting definite decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 102 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals, and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, the process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 103 that executes the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt processing for game control includes, for example, switch processing, error processing on the main side, information output processing, random number update processing for games, special symbol process processing, ordinary symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like. It includes processing to control the progress and so on.

The switch process is a process of determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. The error processing on the main side is a processing in which an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side include a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. It suffices if there is a random number value MR4 for determining the figure display result. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit game state. The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type when the variable display result is "big hit" to one of a plurality of types such as "non-probability variation" and "probability variation". is there. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of prepared patterns. The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "missing normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained.

In the special symbol process processing included in the game control timer interrupt processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the second special symbol display device 4B, set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7, and the like in a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process process is a process that controls the display operation of the normal symbol display 20 to enable the variable display of the normal symbol and the tilting operation setting of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B.

The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in the command control process, the effect control board 12 among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, set the predetermined control data in the output port of the effect control INT signal to turn the effect control INT signal on for a predetermined time and then turn it off. By doing so, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). In the start winning prize determination process, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B are on. At this time, if the first start opening switch 22A is on, the special figure game using the first special figure is based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A. The first start winning process for updating the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the above, is performed. On the other hand, if the second start opening switch 22B is on, a special figure game using the second special figure is based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B. The second start winning process for updating the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the above, is performed.

As an example, in the first start winning process, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved first special figures is a predetermined upper limit value. At this time, if the number of stored first special figures has reached the upper limit, the first start winning process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is less than the upper limit, the first reserved storage count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball passes through the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Will be updated to. After that, a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize is extracted and stored as hold data in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

In the second start winning process, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved second special figures is a predetermined upper limit value. At this time, if the number of reserved second special figures reaches the upper limit, the second start winning process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is less than the upper limit, the second reserved storage count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, is added by 1. In this way, the second reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Will be updated to. After that, a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize is extracted and stored as hold data in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102. And execute.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device are based on the presence or absence of hold data stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit and the second special symbol hold storage unit. It is determined whether or not to start the special figure game by 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the variable display result determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as a "big hit" based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. Derived Determined before being displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is set corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. .. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on a pre-determination result of whether or not the variable display result is a “big hit”. The variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is preset according to the variable pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol that is the variable display result is determined. Further, the variable pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach" when the variable display result is "missing". Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is set to "reach" by determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is "missing" in the variation pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of setting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to start the variation of the special symbol. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop and display the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol. The process of making settings is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the hit start specification command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state based on the special figure display result being "big hit" is set to be transmitted, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to ". Update to 4 ”. If the jackpot flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit pre-opening process, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., the process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit game state and setting to open the big winning opening, etc. It is included. In this process, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the large winning opening is opened may be set to "29 seconds" so that the normal opening round is executed. If "probability" is set for the jackpot type, the short-term open round can be executed by setting the upper limit of the period for keeping the jackpot open to "0.1 seconds". Good. When the jackpot release preprocessing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, a process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like, the big winning opening It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6".

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the big winning opening is opened has reached a predetermined upper limit, and a process of determining whether or not the upper limit has been reached, and a next round game when the upper limit has not been reached. It includes processing that waits until is started. Then, when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4", while when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is "7". Is updated to.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end processing, a waiting period corresponding to a period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as an image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. It includes a process of waiting until the time elapses, a process of making various settings for controlling the probabilistic state and the time saving state according to the success or failure of the probabilistic control condition, and the like. For example, depending on whether the jackpot type is "probability change" or "non-probability change", a setting for controlling the probability change state or the time saving state is made. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 3 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 may read the second hold storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the number of the second special figure reserved storage is other than "0" in step S231 (step S231; NO), the reserved data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, for example, the head area of the second special figure reserved storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is read out (step S232). As a result, the game random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start prize at the second start prize opening in the start prize determination process of step S101 shown in FIG. 3 are read out. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory count value and updating, the second special figure reserved memory is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure reserved memory is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S233). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number "1" in the second special figure hold storage unit is shifted upward one entry at a time. Further, in the process of step S233, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, is updated to "2" (step S234).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step S231 (step S231; YES), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step S235). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 may read the first hold storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is "0". As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved storage number is "0", and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

The special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure. That is, regardless of whether it is the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the special figure game may be executed in the order in which the game balls pass through the starting winning opening. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed is associated with the hold number together with the hold data or separately from the hold data. It may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 so that the order in which the start conditions are satisfied can be specified for the special figure game corresponding to each reserved data.

When the number of the first special figure reserved storage is other than "0" in step S235 (step S235; NO), the reserved data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, for example, the head area of the first special figure reserved storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is read out (step S236). As a result, the game random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start prize at the first start prize opening in the start prize determination process of step S101 shown in FIG. 3 are read out. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved memory count value and updating, the first special figure reserved memory is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S237). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number "1" in the first special figure hold storage unit is shifted upward one entry at a time. Further, in the process of step S237, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

After executing any of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is determined to be either "big hit" or "loss" (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the determination result of whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "loss". Just do it. The CPU 103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read from the random number buffer for variation.

FIG. 5A shows an example of determining the special figure display result by the process of step S239. In this way, whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "miss" is determined by using the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result or the special figure display result determination table. It may be decided by. In the determination example shown in FIG. 5A, the determination ratio of whether or not the special figure display result is a “big hit” is different depending on the presence or absence of the probability variation control in the probability variation state. The CPU 103 may determine that the probability change control is being performed when the probability change flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is on.

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the probability change control is performed in the probability change state, the special figure display result is "" at a higher rate than when the probability change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state. "Big hit" is decided. Therefore, for example, the probability change control is performed based on the fact that the probability change flag is set to the ON state corresponding to the case where the jackpot type is "probability change" by the jackpot end process of step S117 shown in FIG. In the state, the special figure display result is more likely to be a "big hit" and the big hit game state is more likely to occur than when the probability change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state.

In this embodiment, whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Regardless, the special figure display result is determined at a predetermined ratio according to the presence or absence of probability variation control. On the other hand, the determination value is assigned to the special symbol display result corresponding to each of the case of the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case of the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Different decision tables may be prepared. In this case, the assignment of the determined value to the predetermined special symbol display result is different between the case of the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case of the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. You may.

After that, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is a "big hit" (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S240; YES), the big hit flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S241). Further, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 101 is selected and set as a table used for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be assigned to the determination result of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used. The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type read from the variable random number buffer.

FIG. 5B shows an example of determining the jackpot type by the process of step S242. In this determination example, the jackpot type is determined to be either "non-probable change" or "probable change" at a predetermined ratio regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the determinable jackpot type may be different, or the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be different. As an example, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the jackpot type can be determined to be "probable" at a predetermined ratio, while when the variable special map is the second special figure, the jackpot type is "probable". May be set so that it is not determined.

After executing the process of step S242, the jackpot type is stored (step S243). The CPU 103 may store the jackpot type by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102.

If the special symbol display result is not a "big hit" in step S240 (step S240; NO), or after executing the process of step S243, a confirmed special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is determined. (Step S244). As an example, when it is determined in step S240 that the special symbol display result is not a "big hit", a special symbol indicating a predetermined "-" symbol as a lost symbol is determined as a definite special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is "big hit", any of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is determined according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S242. It may be decided as a definite special symbol. More specifically, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", the special symbol indicating the number "3" may be determined as the definite special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability change", the special symbol indicating the number "7" may be determined as the finalized special symbol.

After executing the process of step S244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" (step S245), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "1" in the process of step S245, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 3 is executed.

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S235 (step S235; YES), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step S246), the special symbol Ends normal processing. In this demo display setting, whether or not an effect control command for designating a demonstration display by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. To judge. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 6A is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 3 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 6A, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S261). Then, when the big hit flag is on (step S261; YES), the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined (step S262). On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step S261; NO), the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result becomes "loss" is determined (step S263).

FIG. 6B shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" which is not the reach mode and "reach" which is the reach mode. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of them and when the variable display result is a "big hit".

In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 6A, the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using, for example, a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 101 in advance. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern according to whether the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" or "probability variation". It suffices if it is done. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result becomes "big hit" by referring to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. The fluctuation pattern may be determined.

In the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 6A, there is a case where the game state is the normal state and a case where the game state is the probability change state or the time reduction state and the time reduction control is performed. The fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined by using one of a plurality of loss fluctuation pattern determination tables prepared in advance. In a plurality of lost fluctuation pattern determination tables, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is used as the determination result of the fluctuation pattern according to whether the time is normal or short, and the total number of stored memories. , Should be assigned. The CPU 103 is variable by referring to one of the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables according to the normal time and the time saving, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "missing" may be determined.

In the loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the total number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is determined to be "non-reach" at a higher rate than when the total number of reserved symbols is less than the predetermined number. It suffices if a decision value is assigned. As described above, when the number of reserved special figures is not less than the predetermined number, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be set so as to be more difficult to determine as the reach mode than when the number is less than the predetermined number. As a result, when the number of special figure reservations is relatively large, the average variable display time is shortened as compared with when the number of special figure reservations is relatively small, and the occurrence of invalid start winnings is suppressed, and the game ball by the player. It is possible to reduce the firing stop of.

FIG. 7A shows an example of determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit. In this determination example, the determination ratio of the variation pattern in which the normal reach effect is executed, such as the variation pattern PA3-1, is higher than the determination rate of the variation pattern in which the super reach effect such as the variation patterns PA3-2 and PA3-3 is executed. Is also set to be low.

FIG. 7B shows an example of determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss. In this determination example, the determination ratio of the variation pattern in which the normal reach effect is executed such as the variation pattern PA2-1 is higher than the determination rate of the variation pattern in which the super reach effect such as the variation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 is executed. Is also set to be high.

Further, at the time of a big hit, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect is executed is set to be higher than at the time of loss. As a result, when the variable display result is derived after the super reach effect is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is increased.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 7A, the determination ratio of the variation pattern in which the super reach B effect such as the variation pattern PA3-3 is executed is the variation pattern in which the super reach A effect such as the variation pattern PA3-2 is executed. It is set to be higher than the decision rate of. On the other hand, in the determination example shown in FIG. 7B, the determination ratio of the variation pattern in which the super reach B effect such as the variation pattern PA2-3 is executed is executed, and the super reach A effect such as the variation pattern PA2-2 is executed. It is set to be lower than the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern. Further, at the time of a big hit, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach B effect is executed is set to be sufficiently higher than at the time of loss. Therefore, when the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the gaming state becomes the big hit gaming state, the variable display result is derived after the super reach B effect is executed at a higher rate than when the variable display result does not become the big hit gaming state. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 6B, the variation pattern PA2-1 to PA2-3 and the variation pattern PA3-1 to PA3-3 have the same special figure variation time and content, but the variable display result. Is different whether it is a "loss" or a "big hit". By setting the determination ratios shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, when the super reach effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the normal reach effect is executed. Further, when the super reach B effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the super reach A effect is executed.

After executing any of the processes of steps S262 and S263, the special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is set (step S264). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined according to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. By setting the special symbol variation time, the CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived.

Following the process of step S264, a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. A setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the conditions are satisfied (step S265). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

After executing the process of step S265, the command transmission setting at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed (step S266). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives the first fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, and the first from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the hold storage number notification commands, the storage address in ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is specified. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and a second from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the hold storage number notification commands, the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is specified.

The first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command use the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is an effect control command that specifies the start of fluctuation in the special figure game. The variable pattern specification command is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

After executing the process of step S266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" (step S267), and then the variation pattern setting process ends. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S267, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 3 is executed.

Next, the operation on the effect control board 12 will be described.

In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and set the CTC registers mounted on the effect control board 12. .. After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on. The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time elapses, for example, based on the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, it waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, a control signal that serves as an effect control command is selected from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. To capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

When the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process process is executed. In the effect control process processing, various operations such as display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the like The control content of the effect operation using the effect device is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11. Following the effect control process process, the effect random number update process is executed, and the software updates the numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 122 as various random number values used for the effect control.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the following processes S170 to S176 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. Execute.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process displays a variable display of a decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 based on whether or not a first fluctuation start command or a second fluctuation start command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. It includes a process for determining whether or not to start. The first variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the first special figure is started by the first special symbol display device 4A. The second variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. When either the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform variable display of the decorative symbol in, and other various production operations, it includes a process of determining a fixed decorative symbol and various production control patterns according to a variation pattern of a special symbol, a type of display result, and the like. .. When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, various control data are read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122, and various effects during the variable display of the decorative symbol are performed. Processing for performing control is included. Further, in the effect processing during variable display, the final stop symbol as the final stop symbol, which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is completely stopped and displayed in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11. The process to make it is included. It should be noted that the final decoration symbol may be completely stopped and displayed in response to the fact that the end code is read from the predetermined effect control pattern. In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command elapses, the effect control board 12 is autonomous even if the effect control command from the main board 11 is not used. The variable display result can be confirmed by deriving and displaying the fixed decorative symbol. After performing such effect control and the like, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The variable display stop process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the variable display stop processing, the jackpot game state starts based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command, the determination result of whether or not the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not to be performed. Then, when the variable display result corresponds to "big hit" and the big hit game state is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", while the special figure display result corresponds to "miss". If the jackpot game state is not started, the effect process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to "0".

The jackpot display process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. This jackpot display process includes a process for executing a jackpot notification effect for notifying the start of a jackpot game state based on the reception of a jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 11. Then, when the execution of the jackpot notification effect is completed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5".

The jackpot effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and displays the effect image based on the set content on the screen of the image display device 5. The voice and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by the output of the command to the voice control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on / off / blink by the output of the command to the lamp control board 14. Such as, various effect control in the big hit game state is executed. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "6" in response to, for example, receiving the jackpot end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

The jackpot end effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this jackpot end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and displays an effect image based on the set contents on the screen of the image display device 5. The voice and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by the output of the command to the voice control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on / off / blink by the output of the command to the lamp control board 14. Such as, various effect control at the end of the big hit game state is executed. After that, the effect process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to "0".

FIG. 9A is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 9A, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the final stop symbol or the like to be the final decorative symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol (step S401). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the variation start time determination content such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. , Determine the final stop symbol. In this embodiment, "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (probability)" are determined at the start of fluctuation according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result. Big hit) ”.

FIG. 9B shows an example of determining a decorative symbol to be the final stop symbol in the process of step S401. In this example, when the determination content at the start of fluctuation is "non-reach (loss)", different decorative symbols are determined as the final stop symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a left-determined symbol, which is updated by an effect random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122, and stores it in the ROM 121 in advance. By referring to the prepared left confirmed symbol determination table or the like, among the confirmed decorative symbols, the left confirmed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. Etc., among the fixed decorative symbols, the right fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined decorative symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table previously stored and prepared in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

If the content to be determined at the start of fluctuation is "reach (loss)", the same decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right". The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left / right confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effect, or the like, and prepares the left / right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the decorative symbols having the same stop-displayed symbol numbers in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 are displayed. decide. Further, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. Therefore, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. May be added or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol so that the fixed decorative symbol becomes a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the middle-fixed decorative symbol, the difference between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the difference may be set.

If the decision at the start of fluctuation is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability change (big hit)", it is the same in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". The decorative design of is decided as the final stop design. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 Determines decorative symbols with the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed along with 5C and 5R. At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probable change" or "probable change", whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed, which of the normal symbol and the probabilistic symbol is used as the definite decorative symbol. Should be decided. Specifically, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variation", a fixed decorative symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. In addition, when it is determined that the jackpot type is "probability change" and the promotion effect during the jackpot is not executed, a fixed decoration symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of probability variation symbols. On the other hand, even if the jackpot type is "probability change", when it is decided to execute the jackpot middle promotion effect, the fixed decorative symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. As a result, even though the probabilistic symbols are aligned and displayed as the final decorative symbols, it is possible to prevent the promotion effect during the jackpot from being executed so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

In the process of step S401, whether or not to execute a probabilistic promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a big hit medium promotion effect when the decision content at the start of fluctuation is "non-probable change (big hit)" or "probable change (big hit)". It may be decided. In the re-lottery effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult or unrecognizable to be controlled to the probabilistic state. It is possible to notify that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state by displaying the decorative symbol in a variable manner again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probabilistic jackpot combination consisting of the same probabilistic symbol. In addition, after the decorative symbol is re-variated in the re-lottery effect, the decorative symbol of the non-probability change jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed, so that it may not be notified that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state. Further, it suffices to be able to notify that the player is controlled to the probability change state by executing the jackpot promotion effect during the jackpot game state or at the end of the jackpot game state. When it is determined in the process of step S401 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the re-lottery effect is executed.

After executing the process of step S401, the effect control CPU 120 executes the step-up notice effect determination process (step S402). FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S402 of FIG. 9A as the step-up notice effect determination process. In the step-up notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 10, the effect control CPU 120 first performs the step-up notice effect content determination process (step S501). In step S501, as an example, as a table for determining the step-up notice effect content, a step-up notice effect content determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 is selected and set. In the step-up notice effect content determination table, for example, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (normal time shortened → non-reach (loss)), PA1-2 or PA1-3 (normal time shortened → non-reach (loss)). , PA2-1 (normal reach (loss)), PA2-3 (super reach B (loss)), PA3-1 (normal reach (big hit)), PA3-3 (super reach B (big hit)) Correspondingly, if a numerical value to be compared with the random number value for determining the step-up notice effect content is assigned to any of the determination results of step-up "none", "predictive", "SU1", "SU2", and "SU3". Good. The step-up "predictive" is a predictive effect, and the step-up "SU1", "SU2", and "SU3" are step-up notice effects.

FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of a step-up notice effect content determination table. In the step-up notice production content determination table, as fluctuation patterns, PA1-1 which becomes non-reach (loss) from no normal time shortening, PA1-2 and PA1-3 which becomes non-reach (loss) from normal time shortening, normal reach (Loss) PA2-1, Super Reach B (Loss) PA2-3, Normal Reach (Big Hit) PA3-1, Super Reach B (Big Hit) PA3-3 are determined in each case. , Except for certain cases, it is set so that any one of step-up "none", "predictive", "SU1", "SU2", and "SU3" can be determined.

As a certain case, when the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1, which is non-reach (loss) from no shortening in the normal time, the determination ratio of the step-up "SU3" is set to 0. For this reason, it is set so that it does not become non-reach (loss) after the step-up "SU3" is executed without shortening the normal time.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern is PA1-2, PA1-3, which is non-reach (loss) from the normal time shortening, the determination ratio of the step-ups "SU1", "SU2", and "SU3" is set to 0. Therefore, it is set so that the non-reach (loss) does not occur after the step-ups "SU1", "SU2", and "SU3" are executed without shortening the normal time. Therefore, if the normal time reduction does not develop into the reach effect, the step-up notice effect is not executed, and if the step-up notice effect is executed from the normal time reduction, the reach effect is always executed.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern is PA2-1 which is a normal reach (loss), the determination ratio of the step-up "SU3" is set to 0. Further, even in the case of PA3-1 which is a normal reach (big hit), the determination ratio of the step-up "SU3" is set to 0. Therefore, after the step-up "SU3" is executed, the normal reach is not achieved, and when the step-up "SU3" is executed, the super reach B effect is always executed.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern is PA2-3, which is Super Reach B (loss), the determination rate of the step-up “predictive” is 0. Further, even in the case of PA3-3 which is a super reach B (big hit), the determination rate of the step-up "predictor" is set to 0. For this reason, it is set so that it will not become Super Reach B if it ends with a predictive effect before it develops into a step-up notice effect.

On the other hand, the fluctuation patterns are PB1-1, which is non-reach (loss) from no time reduction and medium reduction, PB1-2, which is non-reach (loss) from time reduction and medium reduction, and PA2-2, which is super reach A (loss). In the case of PA3-2, which is a super reach A (big hit), the predictive effect and the step-up advance notice effect are set not to be executed. In addition, it is set so that it does not develop into Super Reach A after the predictive effect and the step-up advance notice effect are executed. Therefore, since the super reach that develops after the predictive effect or the step-up notice effect is executed is limited to the super reach B, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player who wants to enjoy the super reach B. Further, since the super reach developed without executing the predictive effect or the step-up notice effect is limited to the super reach A, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player who wants to enjoy the super reach A.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is PB1-1 which becomes non-reach (loss) from no time saving and medium shortening, and PB1-2 which becomes non-reach (loss) from time saving and medium shortening, step-up "predictive" "SU1" " The determination ratio of "SU2" and "SU3" may be set to a value other than 0 so that the predictive effect and the step-up advance notice effect can be executed during the time reduction. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is PA2-2 which is Super Reach A (loss) and PA3-2 which is Super Reach A (big hit), the step-up "predictive", "SU1", "SU2", and "SU3" are determined. The ratio may be a value other than 0 so that Super Reach A can be executed after the predictive effect and the step-up advance notice effect are executed. In this case, the super reach developed after the predictive effect and the step-up advance notice effect are executed has the possibility of both super reach A and super reach B, so that the player's interest can be extended.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern is PA2-1 which is a normal reach (loss) and PA3-1 which is a normal reach (big hit), the determination ratio of PA3-1 to PA2-1 at each step-up stage is stepped. The step-up "predictive" is higher than the up "none". In the same case, the rate of determination of the step-up stage is higher in the step-up "SU1" than in the step-up "predictive", and higher in the step-up "SU2" than in the step-up "SU1". The step-up "SU3" is higher than the step-up "SU2".

Further, the determination of PA3-3 for PA2-3 at each step-up stage when the fluctuation pattern is PA2-3 which is super reach B (loss) and PA3-3 which is super reach B (big hit). The ratio is the same as the determination ratio of PA3-1 to PA2-1 at each step-up stage when the fluctuation pattern is PA2-1 which is a normal reach (loss) and PA3-1 which is a normal reach (big hit). Has a tendency of. For this reason, as a whole when the reach effect is executed, the decision rate of the step-up stage is higher in the step-up "predictive" than in the step-up "none", and the step-up "predictive" is higher than the step-up "predictive". "SU1" is higher, step-up "SU2" is higher than step-up "SU1", and step-up "SU3" is higher than step-up "SU2". Further, even if PA1-1, PA1-2, and PA1-3, which are non-reach (loss), are included, the determination ratio of the step-up stage has the same tendency.

After executing the process of step S502, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the super reach B (step S503). This determination is made depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is any of P2-3 and PA3-3, or other than that. As a result, when it is determined that the super reach B is not executed (step S502; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the step-up notice effect determination process as it is.

Further, when it is determined to execute the super reach B (step S502; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs the enemy character determination process (step S503). In step S503, as an example, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for an enemy character updated by the random number circuit 124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, the enemy characters appearing in Super Reach B are determined by referring to the enemy character determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared.

FIG. 12A shows a configuration example of the enemy character determination table used in step S503. In the enemy character determination table shown in FIG. 12A, a numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the enemy character is assigned to the determination result of any of the "normal character", "chance character", and "large chance character". Just do it. In addition, in FIG. 12A, the determination ratio of each determination result is shown instead of the determination value assigned to each determination result.

In this embodiment, PA3-3 with respect to PA2-3 of the enemy character when the fluctuation pattern is PA2-3 which is super reach B (loss) and PA3-3 which is super reach B (big hit). The decision rate of "chance character" is higher than that of "normal character". Further, in the same case, the determination rate of the enemy character is higher in the "large chance character" than in the "chance character".

After executing the process of step S503, the effect control CPU 120 performs the process of determining the number of ally characters (step S504). In step S504, as an example, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for the number of ally characters updated by the random number circuit 124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, the number of ally characters appearing in Super Reach B is determined by referring to the ally character number determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared.

FIG. 12B shows a configuration example of the ally character number determination table used in step S504. In the ally character number determination table shown in FIG. 12B, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value for determining the number of ally characters is assigned to any of the determination results of "1 person", "2 persons", and "3 persons". You just have to. Note that FIG. 12B shows the determination ratio of each determination result instead of the determination value assigned to each determination result. In this embodiment, the enemy character is one and the ally character is one to three, but the enemy character and the ally character may be two or more. Further, in this embodiment, the number of ally characters is determined, but the number of determined ally characters is fixed in the same manner as the enemy character, for example, one person, and the ally is selected from a plurality of ally characters. The character may be determined.

In this embodiment, PA3- with respect to PA2-3 of the number of ally characters when the fluctuation pattern is PA2-3 which is super reach B (loss) and PA3-3 which is super reach B (big hit). The decision rate of 3 is higher for "2 people" than for "1 person". Further, in the same case, the determination ratio of the number of ally characters is higher in "3 people" than in "2 people".

When the number of ally characters is determined, the ally characters appearing in Super Reach B are determined. For example, when the number of ally characters is "1", the ally character A appears. For example, when the number of ally characters is "2", the first ally character A and the second ally character B appear. Further, when the number of ally characters is "3", the first ally character A, the second ally character B, and the third ally character C appear.

Further, when the number of ally characters is determined, the content of the display character, which is a decorative character displayed in the third display area, is determined before the start of the super reach effect B. As shown in FIG. 12B, the display characters displayed in the third display area before the start of the super reach effect B correspond to the number of ally characters, and when the ally character is "1 person", " If the ally character is "2 people", it will be "demon heat!", And if the ally character is "3 people", it will be "god heat!". Therefore, when the decorative character of "super heat!" In the third display area before the start of the super reach effect B is displayed, the ally character becomes "one person" in the super reach B effect, and the super reach effect B starts. When the decorative character of "Demon heat!" In the previous 3rd display area is displayed, in the super reach B production, the ally characters become "2 people", and the "2" in the 3rd display area before the start of the super reach effect B When the decorative character of "God heat!" Is displayed, the number of ally characters becomes "3" in the Super Reach B production.

Further, in this embodiment, the display to be displayed in the third display area when the fluctuation pattern is PA2-3 which is super reach B (loss) and PA3-3 which is super reach B (big hit). The ratio of PA3-3 to PA2-3 of the character content is higher in "Oni-fever!" Than in "Geki-fever!". Further, in the same case, the determination ratio of the content of the display characters to be displayed in the third display area is higher in "God heat!" Than in "Oni heat!". In this way, when the process of step S504 is completed, the effect control CPU 120 ends the step-up notice effect determination process.

Next, the operation of the main effect screen and the movable frame member 60 when the step-up notice effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 19. Here, an example in which the super reach effect is executed after the step-up notice effect will be described. Further, in the step-up notice effect, an example will be described in which a "normal character" is determined as an enemy character, "1 person" is determined as an ally character, and "super heat!" Is determined as a display character in the third display area. ..

FIG. 13 shows an effect screen on which the image display device 5 is displayed from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the first stage of the step-up advance notice effect in the variable display in which the super reach effect is executed after the step-up notice effect. The operation of the movable frame 80 is shown. As shown in FIG. 13A, when the variable display is started, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In this example, in the example shown in FIG. 13 (A), in addition to the decorative symbols that are variablely displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the image display device 5 has the left start winning memory display area 5HL held and stored. It is displayed. Further, the movable frame member 60 is located at the lowermost first position P11. Further, although not shown, the image display device 5 displays a predetermined background image at a position above the movable frame member 60, and a background image connected to this background image is displayed in the movable frame member 60. There is.

As the variable display progresses, as shown in FIG. 13B, a sign effect is executed in which the movable frame member 60 located at the first position P11 moves slightly up and down. While the sign effect is being executed, in the image display device 5, the background display in the image display device 5, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the hold storage of the left start winning memory display area 5HL. The display is maintained.

Following the sign production, it will develop into the first stage of the step-up notice production. In the first stage of the step-up notice effect, as shown in FIG. 13C, the movable frame member 60 moves upward from the first position P11 and reaches the second position P12. At this time, the display area of the image display device 5 is divided into upper and lower parts by the movable frame member 60 to form the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2. While the movable frame member 60 moves from the first position P11 to the second position P12, the decorative symbol display area 5L shown in FIG. 1 is reached when the movable frame member 60 approaches the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The decorative symbols of 5C and 5R and the hold storage display of the left start winning memory display area 5HL are erased, and only the background image is displayed on the image display device 5.

When the movable frame member 60 reaches the second position P12, as shown in FIG. 14A, the first display area AE1 formed above the movable frame member 60 and the first display area AE1 formed below the movable frame member 60 are formed. 2 The area of the display area AE2 is substantially the same. Subsequently, in the first display area AE1, the enemy character EC is displayed together with the dialogue character of "Be prepared". Further, a third display area AE3 is formed in the movable frame member 60. The images displayed in the first display areas AE1 to the third display area AE3 are all images displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, when the step-up notice effect shifts to the first stage, the effect control CPU 120 displays the enemy character EC in the first display area AE1. Further, when the step-up notice effect shifts to the first stage, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the first notification sound from the speaker 8 (8L, 8R) to the voice control board 13 as shown in FIG. 14 (A). Let me. By displaying the enemy character EC in the first display area AE1, it is possible to arouse the expectation for the super reach effect, and the interest is improved. In addition to displaying the enemy character EC in the first display area AE1, the decorative characters "!!" are displayed in the third display area AE3. Further, the background of the third display area AE3 is set as a unique background different from the background of the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2. By displaying the decorative characters in the third display area AE3, it is possible to suggest to the player the progress of the step-up stage and the display of the enemy character EC in the first display area AE1. Further, by using the background of the third display area AE3 as a unique background, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the information displayed in the third display area AE3.

Further, when the movable frame member 60 is located at the second position P12, the enemy character CE may be displayed in the first display area AE1, and the ally character MC (shown in FIG. 17B) is displayed in the second display area AE2. The first ally character MC1, the second ally character MC2, and the third ally character MC3) may be displayed. Therefore, the first display area AE1 is, so to speak, a display area for enemy characters, and the second display area AE2 is, so to speak, a display area for friendly characters. The third display area AE3 at this time is, so to speak, a neutral display area that maintains neutrality between the enemy character and the ally character.

Further, when the step-up advance notice effect shifts to the second stage, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first ally character MC1 in the second display area AE2 as shown in FIG. 14 (B). It is displayed with the dialogue character of "!". At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the voice control board 13 to output a second notification sound different from the first notification sound from the speaker 8 (8L, 8R). By displaying the first ally character MC1 in the second display area AE2, it is possible to arouse the expectation for the super reach effect, and the interest is improved. In addition to displaying the first ally character MC1 in the second display area AE2, the decorative characters "chance !?" are displayed in the third display area AE3. By displaying the decorative characters in the third display area AE3, it is possible to suggest to the player the progress of the step-up stage and the display of the first ally character MC1 in the second display area AE2, and to raise the expectation. Can be done.

Further, when the step-up notice effect shifts from the second stage to the third stage, it shifts to either the third stage of the first pattern or the third stage of the second pattern. When shifting to the third stage of the first pattern, as shown in FIG. 14 (C-1), a decorative character of "super heat!" Is displayed in the third display area AE3 before shifting to the third stage. indicate. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the voice control board 13 to output the third notification sound from the speakers 8 (8L, 8R). After that, as shown in FIG. 15 (A-1), the movable frame member 60 moves from the second position P12 to the third position P13, and the second display area AE2 expands to become the enlarged second display area ED2. The first display area AE1 shown in 15 (A-2) disappears. Furthermore, the first ally character MC1 displayed in the second display area AE2 in the second stage of the step-up notice effect is displayed larger in the enlarged second display area ED2, and the viewing character MC "Ikkuyo!" The dialogue characters that predict the victory of are displayed. In addition, the enemy character EC displayed in the first display area AE1 disappears. Further, in the third display area AE3, the display of the decorative characters of "super heat!" Is continued. By displaying the decorative characters, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the subsequent super reach effect.

As an effect following FIG. 15 (A-1), as shown in FIG. 15 (B-1), decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are formed in the enlarged second display area ED2 in the image display device 5. , The effect of displaying the decorative symbol in the reach mode is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the decorative characters of "super heat!" Are continuously displayed in the third display area AE3.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 15 (C-1), in the enlarged second display area ED2 of the image display device 5, an image of the enemy character EC and the first ally character MC facing each other is displayed, and the super reach is displayed. B production is executed. Further, by displaying the decorative characters of "BOSS BATTLE", the player is notified that the super reach B effect in which the enemy character EC and the first ally character MC start the battle is started. At this time, the decorative pattern in the reach mode is displayed small in the lower left of the enlarged second display area ED2.

Further, when the super reach effect B is started, the super reach start sound is output from the speaker 8. In this way, even if the step-up stage does not change, when there is a change in the display content of the image display area 5, the change sound is output from the speaker 8 in accordance with the change, so that the image display area It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the change in the display content of 5.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16A, the super reach B effect is executed in the enlarged second display area ED2 of the image display device 5. At this time, the decorative characters "BOSS BATTLE!" Are displayed in the third display area AE3 to notify the player that the battle effect is being executed as the super reach B effect.

Then, when the display result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit", the effect that the first ally character MC1 wins is executed in the enlarged second display area ED2 of the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 16 (B-1), the winning first ally character MC1 is displayed in the enlarged second display area ED2 of the image display device 5, and the third display area AE3 is decorated with "777". The design is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (C-1), the movable frame member 60 moves from the third position P13 to the first position P11, and “777” is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. A definite decorative pattern consisting of a jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

Further, when the display result of the special symbol is "missing", the image display device 5 executes an effect in which the enemy character EC wins in the enlarged second display area ED2 after the display shown in FIG. To. After that, as shown in FIG. 16 (B-2), the winning enemy character EC is displayed in the enlarged second display area ED2 of the image display device 5, and in the third display area AE3, other than the jackpot combination of "767". The decorative pattern of the lost combination is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (C-2), the movable frame member 60 moves from the third position P13 to the first position P11, and the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 have "767". A definite decorative symbol consisting of a combination of decorative symbols other than the jackpot combination is derived and displayed.

On the other hand, when shifting to the third stage of the second pattern, as shown in FIG. 14 (C-2), the third display area AE3 is decorated with "pinch !?" before shifting to the third stage. Display characters. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the voice control board 13 to output a fourth notification sound different from the third notification sound from the speakers 8 (8L, 8R). After that, as shown in FIG. 15 (A-2), the movable frame member 60 moves from the second position P12 to the first position P11, and the first display area AE1 expands to become the enlarged first display area ED1. The second display area AE2 shown in 14 (C-2) disappears. Furthermore, the enemy character EC displayed in the first display area AE1 in the second stage of the step-up notice effect is displayed larger in the enlarged first display area ED1, and the enemy character EC "Eat Fuhahaha!" The expected dialogue characters are displayed. Further, the first ally character MC1 displayed in the second display area AE2 disappears. Further, in the third display area AE3, decorative characters of "pinch !?" are displayed. The display of the decorative characters can give the player information that the expectation may not be high.

As an effect following FIG. 15 (A-2), as shown in FIG. 15 (B-2), decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are formed in the enlarged first display area ED1 in the image display device 5. , The decorative symbol is displayed in the reach mode in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Further, in the third display area AE3, decorative characters of "pinch !?" are continuously displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 15 (C-2), in the enlarged first display area ED1 of the image display device 5, an image of the enemy character EC and the first ally character MC facing each other is displayed, and the super reach is displayed. B production is executed. Further, by displaying the decorative characters of "BOSS BATTLE", the player is notified that the super reach B effect in which the enemy character EC and the first ally character MC start the battle is started. At this time, the decorative pattern in the reach mode is displayed small in the lower left of the enlarged first display area ED1. After that, in the enlarged first display area ED1, the effect executed by the image display device 5 after the enlarged second display area ED2 and the movable frame member 60 shown in FIG. 16 move from the third position P13 to the first position P11. The same effect as is executed.

Up to this point, an example has been described in which "1 person" is determined as the number of ally characters and "super heat!" Is determined as the display character in the third display area, but "2 people" is determined as the number of ally characters and the third display area. In some cases, "Oni Fever!" Is determined as the display character for. In this case, instead of displaying the stage before proceeding to the third stage of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 14 (C-1), as shown in FIG. 17 (A), the third display area AE3 is displayed. In addition to displaying the decorative characters of "Demon heat!", Two ally characters MC, a first ally character MC1 and a second ally character MC2, are displayed in the second display area AE2. At this time, the background of the third display area AE3 is different from the background shown in FIG. 14 (C-1). Further, in the second display area AE2, the dialogue characters of "twin power" by the first ally character MC1 and the second ally character MC2 are displayed. After that, the super reach B effect is executed instead of the effect displayed by one person of the first ally character MC1 shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 by the display of the first ally character MC1 and the second ally character MC2. ..

In some cases, "3 people" is determined as the number of ally characters, and "God heat!" Is determined as the display character in the third display area. In this case, instead of displaying the stage before proceeding to the third stage of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 14 (C-1), as shown in FIG. 17 (B), the third display area AE3 is displayed. In addition to displaying the decorative characters of "God heat!", Three ally characters MC of the first ally character MC1, the second ally character MC2, and the third ally character MC3 are displayed in the second display area AE2. At this time, the background of the third display area AE3 is different from the background shown in FIGS. 14 (C-1) and 17 (A). Further, in the second display area AE2, the dialogue characters of "all gathered!" By the first ally character MC1, the second ally character MC2, and the third ally character MC3 are displayed. After that, the effect of displaying one of the first ally characters MC1 shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 is replaced with the effect of displaying the first ally character MC1, the second ally character MC2, and the third ally character MC3. Perform Super Reach B production.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, the effect control CPU 120 expects a big hit by displaying in each of the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2. Perform a suggestion effect that suggests the degree. For example, in the step-up notice effect, the development stage is up to the first stage (SU1) in which the enemy character EC is displayed in the first display area AE1, and the enemy character EC is displayed in the first display area AE1. In the case of up to the second stage (SU2) in which the ally character MC is displayed in the second display area, the jackpot expectation level up to the second stage (SU2) is higher than that up to the first stage (SU1). Is high. In the step-up notice production, before the development to the third stage (SU3), the decorative characters of "super heat!" Are displayed in the third display area AE3, and the process shifts to the third stage (SU3) of the first pattern. In the case where the decorative character "pinch !?" is displayed in the third display area AE3 and the process shifts to the third stage (SU3) of the second pattern, the process shifts to the third stage (SU3) of the first pattern. In the case, the jackpot expectation is higher than in the case of shifting to the third stage (SU3) of the second pattern. Therefore, in addition to the display modes of the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2, the jackpot expectation degree changes depending on the display mode of the third display area AE3. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of different types of the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2 in the step-up notice effect. One of the characters is displayed. Specifically, any one of a plurality of types of "normal character", "chance character", and "large chance character" is displayed as an enemy character EC in the first display area AE1, and the first ally is displayed in the second display area AE2. One of the characters MC1, two of the first ally character MC1 and the second ally character MC2, or one of the three ally of the first ally character MC1, the second ally character MC2, and the third ally character MC3. Displayed as character MC. For this reason, the interest is improved by increasing the combination of the display contents of the first area and the second area.

The display mode of the characters and the like in the display modes of the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2 may be other display modes. For example, a plurality of enemy characters may be displayed in the first display area AE1, or one different ally character may be displayed in the second display area AE2. Alternatively, the enemy character and the ally character may be displayed so as to coexist in each of the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 14 (A), the step-up notice effect proceeds to the first stage (SU1) and the first stage. When the mode of the first display area AE1 is changed so that the enemy character is displayed in the display area AE1, the notification effect of outputting the notification sound from the speaker 8 is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 14B, the effect control CPU 120 advances the step-up notice effect to the second stage (SU2), and the ally character MC (first ally character MC1) is displayed in the second display area AE2. Even when the mode of the first display area AE1 is changed so as to be performed, the notification effect of outputting the notification sound from the speaker 8 is executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the step-up progresses and the changed image is displayed by the notification sound. Further, when the mode of the first display area AE1 is changed by proceeding to the first stage (SU1), a different notification sound is output when the mode of the second display area AE2 is changed by proceeding to the second stage (SU2). ing. Therefore, the player can recognize which mode the first display area AE1 or the second display area AE2 has changed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14B, the aspect after the change of the aspect in which the decorative character of the third display area AE3 is “chance !?” is shown in FIG. The third notification sound output from the speaker 8 when it is "extreme heat!" As shown in (C-1), and the case where it is "pinch !?" as shown in FIG. 14 (C-2). The fourth notification sound output from the speaker 8 is different. Therefore, the player can recognize which mode has been changed by the notification.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, the notification sound is output from the speaker 8 as the notification effect, but the notification effect may be another effect. For example, in the notification effect, the content of the change in the effect may be displayed in characters, figures, or the like on an image display device 5 or a separately provided sub-image display device to perform notification. Specifically, step up! The character of may be displayed. In addition, the notification effect may be performed by expressing characters or figures using a movable accessory, or by moving the movable accessory. Further, when the notification effect is executed by the notification sound, the player may be directly notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the step-up notice effect is executed, such as "It's a step-up". ..

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2 are formed by moving the movable frame member 60 from the first position P11 to the second position P12. Therefore, when the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2 are formed, the movable frame accessory 60 operates, which improves the interest.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the movable frame member 60 moves up and down to change the third display area AE3, specifically, the display position of the third display area AE3 in the vertical direction. Correspondingly, the ratio of the area of the first display area AE1 and the area of the second display area AE2 is different. For example, when the movable frame accessory 60 moves upward, the area of the first display area AE1 becomes smaller and the area of the second display area AE2 becomes wider. Further, as the movable frame member 60 moves downward, the area of the first display area AE1 becomes wider and the area of the second display area AE2 becomes narrower. Therefore, the degree of attention of the first display area AE1, the second display area AE2, and the third display area AE3 can be increased.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the third display area AE3 moves according to the vertical movement of the movable frame accessory 60. Therefore, the movement of the third display area AE3 can be recognized by following the movement of the movable frame member 60, and the player can easily pay attention to the movement of the third display area AE3, which improves the interest.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second stage (SU2) of the step-up notice effect, the first display area AE1 in which the enemy character EC is displayed and the second display area AE1 in which the ally character MC is displayed are displayed. The display area AE2 is formed by dividing the display screen of the image display device 5 into a third display area AE3 formed in the movable frame member 60. Therefore, since the display of the image display device 5 can be changed, it is possible to improve the interest.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible.
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and has been described in the above-described embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have some configurations.

(Modification 1) In the above-described embodiment, in the step-up notice effect, at the time of transition from the sign to the first stage (SU1), at the time of transition from the first stage (SU1) to the second stage (SU2), etc. At this time, the background common to the background displayed in the entire area of the image display area 5 is displayed in the moving movable frame member 60 (third display area AE3), but other displays may be used. .. For example, it may be a dedicated image (background) at the time of transition from the sign to the first stage (SU1) or each step-up stage, or it may be a dedicated image (background) for each stage. Further, at each step-up stage, the degree of expectation may be changed according to the type of background. For example, when shifting from the sign to the first stage (SU1), when a blue image, a red image, and a floral pattern image can be displayed as the background image, the red image is displayed rather than the blue image is displayed. The jackpot expectation is higher for the jackpot image, and the jackpot expectation may be higher when the floral image is displayed than when the red image is displayed. Further, the display contents displayed in the third display area AE3 may be common in each step-up stage, or may be different in any stage or in all stages. When the display content of the third display area AE3 is different at each step-up stage, the degree of expectation may be changed according to the display mode. Further, a plurality of types of display modes at each step-up stage may be prepared so that the degree of expectation changes depending on the display mode at each step-up stage.

In the above embodiment, the expectation degree that changes depending on the display mode of the third display area AE3 is the jackpot expectation degree, but other expectations may be used. For example, it may be the degree of expectation to advance to the next stage in the process of stepping up or pseudo-ream, or when the degree of expectation for the production, for example, the production in which the characters decide the victory or defeat is executed, it is predetermined. It may be the degree of expectation that the character of will win. Alternatively, in a gaming machine in which some points or items are given in order for the player to be advantageous, the degree of expectation that these points or items can be obtained may be obtained.

(Modification 2) In the above embodiment, the movable frame member 60 moves in the vertical direction to form the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2 by the third display area AE3. , The movable frame member 60 may be moved in another manner. For example, as shown in FIG. 18A, the left-right movable frame member 65 may move in the left-right direction. In this case, as shown in FIG. 18A, the left and right movable frame members 65 arranged at the right end of the image display device 5 move to the left on the front side of the image display device 5. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 18B, when the left and right movable frame member 65 moves to the center position of the image display device 5, a third display area AE13 is formed in the left and right movable frame member 65. The first display area AE11 is formed on the right side of the image display device 5, and the second display area AE12 is formed on the left side. In this way, the first display area AE11 and the second display area AE12 are formed by the third display area AE13. For example, the enemy character EC similar to the above embodiment is displayed in the first display area AE11, and the ally character MC is displayed in the second display area AE12, and the step-up notice effect is executed. Further, the movable frame member 60 may be driven by the movable frame member motor 61, or may be moved by using an actuator or other driving device. Further, when moving the movable frame member, a link mechanism or the like may be used between the drive device and the movable frame member.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19A, the tilting movable frame member 67 may be tilted about a tilting point located at the lower right of the image display device 5. In this case, as shown in FIG. 19A, the tilting movable frame member 67 arranged in an upright state at the right end of the image display device 5 has a tip on the front side of the image display device 5 centered on the tilt point. Tilt so that it goes down to the lower left. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 19B, when the tiltable frame member 67 is arranged along the diagonal line connecting the upper left and lower right of the image display device 5, the tilting movable member 67 is stopped. Subsequently, the tip of the tiltable movable member 67 is stretched. In this way, as shown in FIG. 19C, the tiltable movable member 67 is laid between the upper left and the lower right of the image display device 5. At this time, a third display area AE23 is formed in the tiltable frame member 67, a first display area AE21 is formed on the upper right side of the image display device 5, and a second display area AE22 is formed on the lower left side. Will be done. In this way, the first display area AE21 and the second display area AE22 are formed by the third display area AE23. For example, the enemy character EC similar to the above embodiment is displayed in the first display area AE21, and the ally character MC is displayed in the second display area AE22.

Further, in the above embodiment, the third display area AE3 forms two display areas, the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2, but the third display area forms the first display area AE1 and the first display area AE2. 2 Display area AE2 may be added with another display area to form three or more display areas. Further, in order to form the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2, one display area of the third display area AE3 is provided, but the first display area and the first display area are provided by two or more display areas. Two display areas may be formed, or three or more display areas may be formed by adding other display areas to the first display area and the second display area. Further, although the third display region AE3 is physically integrally formed, it may be formed in a separated state (a state separated from each other). Further, in the above embodiment, the first display area AE1 to the third display area AE3 are formed on the same surface, but may be formed on surfaces having different distances from the player. For example, the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2 are formed on the same surface, and the third display area AE3 is more of a player than the surface on which the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2 are formed. It may be formed on a surface arranged nearby. Further, the first display area AE1 to the third display area AE3 may be a three-dimensional display area instead of a flat surface.

(Modification 3) In the above embodiment, the third display area AE3 is formed in the movable frame member 60, but the third display area may be formed in another embodiment. For example, an image such as the movable frame member 60 is displayed on the image display device 5 without using an accessory such as the movable frame member 60, and a third display area is formed in the image to form the third display area. The first display area and the second display area may be formed depending on the area. Further, the first display area and the second display area are formed so as to be in contact with the opposing lines of the third display area displayed on the image display device 3 without forming the movable frame member 60 or its image. , The first display area and the second display area may be formed by the third display area. Further, the third display area AE3 may be other than the image of the image display device 5 surrounded by the movable frame member 60. For example, a sub-image display device such as an LCD may be separately provided on the movable frame member 60, and an image corresponding to the third display area may be displayed on the sub-image display device. Further, when a plurality of third display areas AE3 are formed, the plurality of third display areas may be provided in each of the plurality of members, or may be provided in one member. Further, a part of the third display area may be formed by the display of the image display device 5, and the other part of the third display area may be provided on another member or the like.

(Modification 4) In the above embodiment, the movable frame member 60 is arranged at the second position P12 so that the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2 are displayed at the same ratio (50:50). However, it may be displayed at another ratio. For example, the movable frame member 60 is arranged at a position lower than the second position P12 and higher than the first position P11 so that the ratio of the display areas of the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2 is 80:20. May be good. Further, the movable frame member 60 is arranged at a position higher than the second position P12 and lower than the third position P13 so that the ratio of the display areas of the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2 is 20:80. May be good. Further, the movable frame member 60 is arranged at any of three positions of the first position 11, the second position P12, and the third position P13, but can be arranged at four or more positions. You may do so.

(Modification 5) In the above embodiment, the movable frame member 60 moves in one way as the step-up stage progresses, but the movable frame member 60 may move in a plurality of ways. .. For example, in addition to the movement mode of the above-described embodiment, when the step-up notice effect advances from the predictive stage to the second stage (SU2), the movable frame member 60 moves to, for example, the third position P13 and then the second. You may want to move to a position. Further, when a plurality of movement modes are provided, the degree of expectation may be changed according to the movement mode. For example, when the step-up notice effect proceeds from the sign stage to the second stage (SU2), the movement mode in which the movable frame member 60 moves to the second position after moving to the third position P13, for example, is a step-up notice. When the effect progresses from the sign stage to the second stage (SU2), the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the movable frame member 60 moves to the second position as it is.

Further, the timing at which each character is displayed in the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2 may be the same timing or different timings. In the above embodiment, each display area is different so that the enemy character EC is displayed in the first display area AE1 in the first stage and the ally character is displayed in the second display area AE2 in the second stage. Although the display is performed at the timing, it may be displayed in the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2 at the same time in any step-up stage or the like. Further, the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2 may be displayed in a plurality of steps with the progress of the step-up or apart from the progress of the step-up. In this case, the display may be progressed stepwise over a plurality of variable display games (special figure games). Similarly, the display may be performed at the same timing between the first display area AE1 or the second display area AE2 and the third display area AE3, or may be displayed at different timings.

(Modification 6) In the above embodiment, the movable frame member 60 forms a third display region by moving an integral frame body (accessory), but the movable frame member is formed in another embodiment. You may. For example, the movable frame member may be deformed, or the movable frame member may be formed by combining (or combining) a plurality of parts (parts). In the embodiment in which the movable frame member is formed by a plurality of parts, each part may be arranged at a plurality of positions such as a plurality of top, bottom, left, and right. Further, when each part moves to a position where it is connected before being connected as a movable frame member, it may be accompanied by a complicated movement such as rotation. Further, the movable frame member and each of these parts not only move on a plane parallel to the surface of the game board 3, but also move in a direction orthogonal to the game board 3, so to speak, three-dimensional movement. It may be accompanied. Further, each part may be operated by using a link mechanism or the like. In the image display device 5, when the first display area and the second display area are formed so as to be in contact with the opposite lines of the third display area, or when the movable frame member is deformed, the third display area The area of may vary.

(Modification 7) In the above embodiment, even when the movable frame member 60 is arranged at the first position P11, the movable frame member 60 is located on the front side of the image display device 5, and the movable frame member 60 is located. Although the 60 is always visible to the player, the movable frame member 60 may be arranged at a position where it cannot be visually recognized depending on the moving position. For example, before the start of the sign effect or the step-up notice effect, the movable frame member 60 is arranged on the back side of the screen of the image display device 5, or a decorative accessory is provided around the image display device 5, and the decorative accessory is provided. A movable frame member 60 is arranged on the back side of an object so that the movable frame member 60 is hidden so that the player cannot see it, and the movable frame member 60 moves when a sign effect or a step-up notice is executed. Then, it may be moved to a position not hidden by the image display device 5 or the decorative accessory so that the player can visually recognize it.

(Modification 8) In the above embodiment, the types of ally characters determined in the step-up notice effect are three, which is the same number as the number that can be determined, but the types of characters that can be determined are determined. The number of characters to be played may be large. For example, in the above embodiment, one enemy character is determined from the three determinable enemy characters, but the ally character can also be determined from a plurality of people, for example, three ally characters. You may decide one ally character. Further, when the number of characters to be determined is 3, the number of characters that can be determined is 4 or 5 or more, and the character may be determined from this number of characters. Further, when the number of characters that can be determined is smaller than the number of characters to be determined, a plurality of the same characters may be determined.

Further, even if the number of determined characters is the same, the degree of expectation may differ depending on the determined characters. For example, when determining three ally characters of five ally characters from the first ally character to the fifth ally character, the third is more than the case where three ally characters, the first ally character, the second ally character, and the third ally character are determined. The degree of expectation may be higher when three ally characters, a fourth ally character, and a fifth ally character are determined. As for the height of expectation, for example, strength points are attached to each character, and the total strength of the determined characters may determine the overall strength. Further, when a specific combination occurs, there may be a strength point that is specially added to the strength point.

Further, in the above embodiment, the degree of expectation is determined by the strength of the enemy character and the ally character regardless of the compatibility between the enemy character and the ally character, but the degree of expectation changes depending on the compatibility between the enemy character and the ally character. It may be. For example, even if it is a normal character with a low expectation and a weak ally character, in the case of a specific combination, the compatibility may be good and the expectation may be high.

(Modification 9) In the above-described embodiment, in the reach effect after the step-up effect, the decorative pattern is displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the reach mode. The decorative symbol may not be displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R during or before and after, especially during the reach production. Further, even if the decorative pattern is displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern may be displayed transparently or semi-transparently so that the background can be seen through. Further, in the reach effect, the decorative symbol display area may be provided small at any of the four corners of the symbol display device 5 to display the decorative symbol in the reach mode.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, when the step-up effect is executed, at least an effect different from the step-up effect is displayed in the first display area AE1 to the third display area AE3. It may be executed in one display area. In particular, other notice effects may be performed in at least one display area of the first display area AE1 to the third display area AE3. Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, when the step-up notice effect is being executed, the display of the number of holds in the left start winning memory display area 5HL and the right start winning memory display area 5HR is deleted. However, the number of holds in the left start winning memory display area 5HL and the right start winning memory display area 5HR may be left displayed. Alternatively, the left start winning memory display area 5HL and the right start winning memory display area 5HR may be reduced to display the number of holds.

Further, in the above embodiment, the background image of the third display area AE3 is changed as the step-up effect progresses, but the background image is also changed in the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2. There may be a change, or an effect image or the like may be displayed in at least one display area of the first display area AE1 to the third display area AE3. In these cases, a background image, an effect image, or the like that can be displayed in common in the first display area AE1 to the third display area AE3 may be provided. The background image or effect image that can be displayed in common in the first display area AE1 to the third display area AE3 may be an image mode that displays a specific pattern or a group of specific characters. Further, when displaying a background image or an effect image that can be displayed in common in the first display area AE1 to the third display area AE3, a common notification sound or lamp may be emitted.

Further, in the above embodiment, when shifting from the second stage of the step-up effect shown in FIG. 14 (B) to the third stage of the second pattern shown in FIG. 14 (C-2), the third display is displayed. The decorative characters displayed in the area AE3 shift from "chance !?" to "pinch !?", which is a so-called downfall mode that may give the impression that expectations are low. The production may not be provided.

(Modification 10) In the above embodiment, the variation mode of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R may be an appropriate mode. For example, it may be a so-called vertical scrolling variable display in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed so as to flow from top to bottom, or a so-called vertical scrolling variable display in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed so as to flow from top to bottom. Alternatively, the update display may be performed by updating on the spot. At the time of displaying these, a plurality of decorative symbols such as two or three adjacent decorative symbols may be displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. When displaying a plurality of decorative symbols, it may be a so-called double reach or triple reach in which the decorative symbols displayed in the reach mode are two or three types.

(Modification 11) In the above embodiment, an LCD (liquid crystal display) is used as the image display device 5 as a display device for displaying decorative patterns and various effects, but other display devices may also be used. Good. For example, a rotating drum on which a decorative pattern or a character for production is drawn may be used. This type of rotating drum is provided with a plurality of frames (mass), and each frame may have a plurality of decorative patterns displayed, a plurality of characters may be displayed, or a decorative pattern may be displayed. And characters may be mixed and displayed. Further, the step-up effect may be a step-up effect in which the stage shifts by rotating the drum on which a plurality of characters are displayed. Further, as a display device for displaying a decorative pattern or various effects, the display device may be irradiated by a projector that projects an image including an image such as a decorative pattern or a character from a projector. In this case, for example, the decorative pattern changes due to projection mapping. It may be a display, an effect display, or the like. Further, the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be an appropriate image. For example, it may be an image such as an animation or a graphic image. Alternatively, it may be a live-action image of a person or a background, and in particular, a promotional video may be used when producing music.

(Modification 12) In the above embodiment, in the second stage (SU2) of the step-up notice effect, the enemy character EC is displayed in the first display area AE1 before the ally character MC is displayed in the second display area AE2. Is displayed, but the ally character MC may be displayed first in the second display area AE2. Further, each pattern of the pattern in which the enemy character EC is displayed first in the first display area AE1 and the pattern in which the ally character MC is displayed first in the second display area AE2 may be feasible. In this case, the degree of expectation may change depending on whether the character displayed first is an enemy character or a ally character.

Further, the ally character MC may be displayed in the first display area AE1, and the enemy character EC may be displayed in the second display area AE2. Further, one of the ally character MC and the enemy character EC may be displayed in the first display area AE1, and the other may be displayed in the second display area AE2. In this case, the degree of expectation may change depending on whether the ally character MC is displayed in the first display area AE1 or the second display area AE2. Further, the degree of expectation may be changed depending on the display order of the enemy character EC and the ally character MC. In addition, a plurality of friendly characters and enemy characters may be displayed in the second stage and other stages. Further, for example, in principle, the enemy character EC is displayed in the first display area AE1 and the ally character MC is displayed in the second display area AE2, the ally character MC is displayed in the first display area AE1, and the second display area AE1 is displayed. When the enemy character EC is displayed in the display area AE2, a so-called definite effect in which the jackpot expectation is 100% may be provided. Further, among the final effects, a so-called premium effect that appears at an extremely low appearance rate (for example, 1/1000 at the time of a big hit) may be provided.

(Modification 13) In the above embodiment, a notification sound is output as appropriate when shifting to each step-up stage in the step-up notice effect, but a notification sound may be output at all stages as appropriate. The notification sound may be output at the timing of. Further, at each stage, it is possible to output a plurality of types of notification sounds, and the degree of expectation may change according to the output notification sounds. Further, when the notification sound is output, characters corresponding to the notification sound may be displayed, or the enemy character EC or the ally character MC reacts to the notification sound to produce the notification sound and the image display. It may be linked.

(Modification 14) In the above-described embodiment, the step-up notice effect can be executed up to the third stage (SU3) following the predictive effect, but may be executed up to two stages. However, it may be possible to execute up to four or more stages. Further, the predictive effect may or may not be provided. Further, when the predictive effect is being executed, the notification sound corresponding to the predictive effect may be output.

(Modification 15) In each of the step-up notice effect, reach effect, super reach effect, and the like, explanatory characters for explaining the result of the effect to the player may be displayed on the image display device 5 or other display devices. For example, in the super reach effect of the above embodiment, when the effect that the ally character MC wins the enemy character EC is executed, a big hit is displayed as "If the ally character wins, it is a big hit !?" You may try to explain. In addition, when giving such an explanation, symbols such as "~ big hit?" "~ Big hit ..." may be added at the end to avoid affirmative expressions.

(Modification 16) In each of the step-up notice effect, reach effect, super reach effect, and the like, the possibility of achieving the expected items may be displayed at a predetermined timing. Here, the expected items are items that the player expects in the process of progress of the game, for example, items that shift to super reach and items that become a big hit. Examples of the display of the possibility of achieving the expected item include the display of the jackpot expectation at the time of reach development and the super reach development, and the display of the super reach development expectation during the step-up notice production. The indication of the achievability of these expectations can be expressed by, for example, the number of stars. For example, five stars that can be painted black can be displayed, and the degree of expectation can be expressed in five stages by the number of stars painted black. For example, if there are 4 black-painted stars and 1 unfilled star, the expectation is higher than if there are 3 black-painted stars and 2 unfilled stars. .. As a mode of filling the star, for example, the entire area may be filled or half of the star may be filled. In this case, 10 levels of expectation can be displayed with 5 stars. Further, the star indicating the jackpot expectation degree displayed at the time of the development of the super reach may be displayed at any of the four corners of the image display device 5 during the execution of the super reach effect. In addition, the number of black-painted stars indicating the jackpot expectation may be increased or decreased during the execution of the super reach effect. Further, in the above embodiment, the expectation degree is the jackpot expectation degree, but other expectations may be used. For example, it may be an expectation degree that develops into a reach effect or a super reach effect, or an open round may be an expectation degree that increases from the number of previously reported rounds if it is a big hit.

(Modification 17) In the above embodiment, variable display is started in order to notify the effect control CPU 120 of a variable display time indicating a variable display mode such as a variable display time of a decorative symbol and a type of reach effect. Although an example of transmitting one variation pattern designation command is shown at times, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control CPU 120 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, in the game control microcomputer 100, as the first command, the presence or absence of a variable display effect such as "slip" or "pseudo-ream" is variable before reaching. A command indicating the display time and the variable display mode is transmitted, and as a second command, a command indicating the variable display time and the variable display mode after reaching, such as the type of reach and the presence or absence of the re-lottery effect, is transmitted. You may do so. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable display time derived from the two commands. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the variable display time by each of the two commands, and the effect control CPU 120 selects the specific variable display mode to be executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or the second command may be sent after a predetermined time has passed after the first command was sent. You may try to do it. Further, the variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored and prepared in advance as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

(Modification 18) The present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. A slot machine is an arbitrary game machine capable of performing a predetermined game such as a variable display of a symbol serving as a plurality of types of identification information and imparting a predetermined game value based on the game result, and more specifically, the slot machine. 1. By setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, the game can be started, and the display result of the variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each is derived and displayed. This is a gaming machine in which one game is completed and a prize can be generated according to the display result. In such a slot machine, the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in the above embodiment has the hardware resources including the image display device of the slot machine and the software that performs a predetermined process in cooperation with each other. It may be configured to have all or part of the features.

Slot machines are not limited to those in which the number of bets is set using medals and credits as the game value, but only slot machines that set the number of bets using game balls as the game value and credits as the game value. It may be a fully credited slot machine that sets the number of bets using. When using a game ball as a game medium, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls. For example, when setting 3 as the number of bets, 15 game balls are used for the number of bets. Corresponds to the one that sets. The pachinko game machine 1 and the slot machine are not limited to those using only one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and for example, a plurality of types such as medals and game balls. It may be one that can be used in combination with a gaming value. For example, a slot machine can play a game by setting a bet number using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and can play medals and game balls by generating a prize. Any of a plurality of types of gaming values may be paid out.

As the effect that can be executed in such a slot machine, it is sufficient that the advance notice effect and the meter effect in the meter change notification mode in the above-described embodiment are included.

(Modification 19) In addition, an image display operation in an image display device for executing a predetermined effect such as a device configuration and a data configuration of a game machine, a process shown in a flowchart, and a notice effect, an audio output operation in a speaker, and more Various effects such as lighting operations of the game effect lamps and decorative LEDs can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the game machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but is based on the generation of a prize ball by enclosing the game ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives a score.

(Modification 20) The program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine. The form is not limited to the form, and the form may be distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

(Modification 21) The game is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like are temporarily stored in an internal memory or the like. This may be a form in which execution is possible, or a form in which it is directly executed using the hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

(Modification 22) In the above embodiment, "different ratios" are limited to those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. Not limited to this, the concept includes those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0%.

(Modification 23) In the above embodiment, for example, a case is shown in which a plurality of types of special symbols and decorative symbols of "1" to "8" are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol is derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

(Modification 24) In the above embodiment, the update timing of each random number may be different, or the update range of each random number may be different so that the random numbers are not synchronized.

(Modification 25) In the above embodiment, a table for determining a random number value is stored in the main board 11, and the main board 11 has a random value based on the random value extracted in the main board 11 at the time of starting winning. An example in which a determination process of a random number value is executed with reference to a determination table, the effect control board 12 receives a determination result determined by the main board 11, and executes a pre-reading notice effect based on the received determination result. However, the execution mode of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the effect control board 12 stores the above-mentioned random number value determination table, and the effect control board 12 receives the random number value itself extracted from the main board 11 from the main board 11, and based on the received random number value. The random value determination process may be executed with reference to the random value determination table, and the pre-reading advance notice effect may be executed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the random value determination process may be performed on the effect control board 12. Further, the random value determination process may be performed on both the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. For example, the effect control board 12 may receive a part of the random numbers and execute the random value determination process, and may also receive the determination result determined by the main board 11. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 12 receives a random number value and determines whether or not it will be a big hit, and if it is a big hit, it executes a determination of the type of big hit, and the main board 11 is based on the random number value. The determination result of the variation pattern type determined in is may be received. That is, the effect control board 12 can execute the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 11.

(Modification 26) In the above embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, the interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is turned on, and the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. It was explained as being caused by. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command may be generated by an interrupt request by the first bit of serial communication.

(Modification 27) In the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1, by operating the input device, the enemy character, the ally character, or various production modes may be customized according to the taste of the player. In addition to the above characters, examples of the customization target include background images in the first display area to the third display area, fonts (fonts) of decorative characters, and the like.

(Modification 28) Further, when a predetermined error such as a door opening error or a ball jam error occurs during the execution of the sign effect or the step-up notice effect, the movable frame is used in the sign effect or the step-up notice effect. The member 60 may not be moved. Further, even if an error occurs when the movable frame member 60 is operated during other effects, the operation of the movable frame member 60 may be stopped.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), and has a first display area (for example, a first display area AE1 or the like) and a second display. An area (for example, a second display area AE2 or the like), a third display area between the first display area and the second display area (for example, a third display area AE3 or the like), and the first display area. Suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation by displaying in each of the second display areas (for example, displaying the enemy character EC and the ally character MC in each of the first display area AE1 and the second display area AE2). The third display area is provided with a suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 or the like) for executing a step-up notice effect suggesting a jackpot expectation level, and when the suggestion effect is being executed. The degree of expectation differs depending on which of the plurality of types of display modes the display mode is (for example, the decorative character "super heat!" Is displayed in the third display area AE3, and the first pattern Big hit expectation depending on the case of shifting to the third stage (SU3) of the second pattern and the case of shifting to the third stage (SU3) of the second pattern when the decorative character "pinch !?" is displayed in the third display area AE3. Further, it is provided with a specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect that maintains the mode of the effect (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 that can execute a specific effect that maintains the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051). As the specific effect, a period for maintaining the first aspect (a period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 vertically) and a period for maintaining the second aspect (a period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 horizontally). Can execute different effects, and the degree of expectation differs depending on the length of the period for maintaining the second aspect (for example, when the specific effect is executed, the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways. The longer the time is, the higher the expectation of a big hit, etc.) Game machines can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, when the suggestion effect is executed in the first display area and the second display area, the display of the third display area provided between the first display area and the second display area is displayed. Since the degree of expectation changes according to the mode, it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to pay attention to the period during which the mode of production is maintained.

It should be noted that the execution of the suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation by displaying in each of the first display area and the second display area, and the orientation of the specific effect (for example, the sub-image display device 9051) that maintains the mode of the effect. It may be controlled in association with the execution of the specific effect to be maintained). For example, when the display mode of the third display area is a display mode having a high degree of expectation in the suggestion effect, the effect of maintaining the second mode for a long period of time (for example, the sub-image display device 9051) is used as a specific effect having a high degree of expectation. An effect that is maintained sideways for a long time) may be executed (or facilitated). In this way, when the display mode of the third display area is the display mode with high expectation in the suggestion effect, it can be recognized that the expectation is high even in the specific effect, so that the interest of the game effect is improved. be able to.
Alternatively, the execution content of the suggestion effect and the execution content of the specific effect may be determined independently without being associated with each other. In this way, when the display mode of the third display area is the display mode with high expectation in the suggestion effect, the expectation can be maintained even when the expectation is low in the specific effect, and the specific effect can be maintained. In the case of a specific effect in which the second mode is maintained for a long period of time in the effect, the expectation can be maintained even if the display mode of the third display area in the suggestion effect is a display mode with a low degree of expectation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game production.

Further, as an example of the form of a gaming machine that can improve the interest and also pay attention to the period during which the mode of production is maintained, the gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. (For example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) for effect control capable of executing a specific effect that maintains the mode of the effect (for example, a specific effect that maintains the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051). A CPU 90120, etc.) is provided, and as the specific effect, a period for maintaining the first aspect (a period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the vertical direction) and a period for maintaining the second aspect (the sub-image display device 9051 in the horizontal direction). It is possible to execute an effect different from the period (maintenance period), and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the length of the period for maintaining the second aspect (for example, when a specific effect is executed). , The longer the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways, the higher the expectation of a big hit, etc.). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 20 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is roughly classified into a gaming board 902 that constitutes the game board surface and a gaming machine frame 903 that supports and fixes the game board 902. The game board 902 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device into this game area.

A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 902. Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, and is a plurality of types of special symbol games that can be identified as an example of a variable display game. The special symbol, which is the special identification information of, is displayed in a variable manner. For example, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B can variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", respectively. To do. Then, at the end of the variable display, the variable display result is derived and displayed by stopping and displaying the fixed special symbol as the variable display result.

The variable display result and the variable display special symbol that are derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B indicate a number indicating "0" to "9" or "-". It is not limited to those composed of symbols and the like. For example, in the 7-segment LED, a plurality of types of lighting patterns having different combinations of those to be turned on and those to be turned off may be preset as a plurality of types of special symbols. The lighting pattern of the variable display may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off as appropriate.

In the following, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as the "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is referred to as the "second special symbol". Also called. Further, the special figure game of the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game of the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game".

An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effects images. On the screen of the image display device 905, identification information different from the special symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display area which is a plurality of variable display units such as three, corresponding to the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. The decorative pattern is variably displayed.

As an example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 905. Then, corresponding to the start of either the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, At 905R, the change of the decorative pattern is started. After that, when the variable display result in the special figure game is derived and displayed, the decorative symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 905. The fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is stopped and displayed.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 905, each can be identified in synchronization with the first special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 904B. Variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols is performed, and the variable display result is derived and displayed at the end of the variable display.

In addition, to derive and display various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means to stop and display the identification information such as the decorative symbol and end the variable display. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol becomes "0" and the decoration is displayed. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking, expansion and contraction, for example. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitively displayed, the player can recognize that the change of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. It should be noted that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

A display area 905H is arranged on the screen of the image display device 905. In the display area 905H, a display is performed so that the number of special figure games whose execution is suspended can be specified. The special figure game whose execution is suspended is a special figure game that has not been started yet, and is stored as a hold memory. In this embodiment, by storing the information for executing the special figure game, the special figure game corresponding to the information is stored as the hold storage. Therefore, the number of reserved special figures games is also referred to as the number of reserved special figures. Further, the display in which the number of reserved special figure games displayed in the display area 905H can be specified is also referred to as a reserved storage display.

The holding of the special figure game is, for example, a start winning prize due to a game ball entering the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 906A or the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. Occurs based on. That is, although the start condition for executing the special figure game is satisfied, the special figure game based on the previously established start condition is being executed, the pachinko game machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot game state, and the like. Therefore, when the start condition that allows the start of the special figure game is not satisfied, the special figure game corresponding to the established start condition is put on hold.

For example, when the start condition of the first special figure game is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first start prize, the first start condition for starting the first special figure game based on the establishment of the first start condition is satisfied. If not, the number of stored first special figures is added by 1, and the execution of the first special figure game is suspended. In addition, when the start condition of the second special figure game is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second start prize, the second start condition for starting the second special figure game based on the establishment of the second start condition is satisfied. If not, the number of the second special figure reserved memory is added by 1, and the execution of the second special figure game is suspended. When the execution of the first special figure game is started, the first special figure reserved storage number is subtracted by 1, and when the execution of the second special figure game is started, the second special figure reserved storage number is subtracted by 1. Will be done.

The variable display special figure hold storage number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also particularly referred to as the total hold storage number. The term "special figure reserved memory" usually refers to a concept including all of the first special figure reserved memory, the second special figure reserved memory, and the total reserved memory, but in particular, it refers to a part of these. It shall be possible.

In this embodiment, the hold storage display is performed by displaying the same number of symbol images as the hold special figure game. One hold display image corresponds to one hold special figure game and shows the hold special figure game. The hold display image corresponding to the first special figure game is displayed in the area 905HA on the left side of the display area 905H. A plurality of display positions of the first hold display image are set in the area 905HA, and the first hold display image is displayed left-justified in order from the leftmost display position. The hold display image corresponding to the second special figure game is displayed in the area 905HB on the right side of the display area 905H. A plurality of display positions of the second hold display image are set in the area 905HB, and the second hold display image is displayed left-justified in order from the leftmost display position.

When the first special figure game is executed, the leftmost first hold display image is deleted. At this time, if there are other first hold display images, each of the other first hold display images is shifted to the display position adjacent to the left. When the second special figure game is executed, the leftmost second hold display image is deleted. At this time, if there are other second hold display images, each of the other second hold display images is shifted to the display position adjacent to the left.

A display device for displaying the number of reserved special figures may be provided together with the display area 905H or in place of the display area 905H. In the example shown in FIG. 20, together with the display area 905H, the first hold display 9025A for identifiablely displaying the number of special figure hold storages on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B And a second hold display device 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the number of first special figure hold storage identifiable. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable. The first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B are configured to include, for example, a number of LEDs corresponding to the upper limit values of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number, respectively. .. Here, the number of stored first special figures and the number of stored second special figures are displayed according to the number of LEDs lit.

A sub-image display device 9051 is provided on the right side of the image display device 905. Similar to the image display device 905, the sub-image display device 9051 is composed of an LCD or the like and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the sub-image display device 9051, an image related to the image displayed on the image display device 905 is displayed, and the effect operation in which the display image on the image display device 905 and the display image on the sub-image display device 9051 are linked. Is done. Further, the sub-image display device 9051 is configured so that the front side of the image display device 905 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by, for example, the drive motor 9052 shown in FIG.

On the screen of the sub-image display device 9051, a small symbol display area 9051V smaller than the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R is provided. On the screen of the sub-image display device 9051 shown in FIG. 20, a small symbol display area 9051V is provided in the lower portion. In the small symbol display area 9051V, the variable display of the small symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. The effect image showing a small pattern is also called a broadcast information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 9051V provided on the screen of the sub-image display device 9051, the effect image showing the small symbol to be the broadcast information image is variably displayed, and the effect image showing the confirmed small symbol to be the display result is displayed. Is derived.

In this way, on the screen of the sub-image display device 9051, a variable display of a small symbol different from the decorative symbol is performed. During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation of the final decorative symbol that is the display result, the variable display of the small symbol is continuously performed in a certain display mode, and disappears from the screen or is a shield. It is not shielded by. Therefore, the small symbol display area 9051V is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 9051V. The small symbol that is variably displayed in the small symbol display area 9051V is also referred to as a constant small symbol or a small symbol for production. In the small symbol display area 9051V, a plurality of types that can be identified by a display mode in which some or all of the plurality of types of decorative symbols are common to each of the plurality of types of decorative symbols, such as a symbol that indicates a number as well as a part that indicates a number in the decorative symbol. The effect image showing the small symbol of the above may be variably displayed as the broadcast information image.

A fourth symbol is provided next to the special symbol, the decorative symbol, and the normal symbol, and the variable display of the fourth symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. The variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed in a specific display color at regular time intervals, for example, in the fourth symbol display area provided on the screen of the image display device 905 or the screen of the sub-image display device 9051. It is realized by continuing the display control that repeats hiding. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbol may be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Further, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 905, for example, on the right side of the game area in the pachinko gaming machine 901 shown in FIG. Has been done. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player paying attention to the effect of the display on the image display device 905 and the sub-image display device 9051 to check the display state on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, which makes it special. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display of the symbol is in progress and whether or not the display result is derived. On the other hand, by variably displaying the small symbol in the small symbol display area 9051V provided on the screen of the sub-image display device 9051 and deriving the display result, whether or not the variable display is in progress is determined. Whether or not the display result is derived can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Below the image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B includes an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed to a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory. 2 Form a starting winning opening.

The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening because, for example, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. Become. On the other hand, the normal variable winning ball device 906B is open so that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state. Become in a state. The normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the normally open state when the solenoid 9081 is in the off state, and is expanded and opened so that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening when the solenoid 9081 is in the on state than in the normally open state. It may be configured to be in a state. The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B may be changed to, for example, a first variable state and a second variable state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting winning opening than the first variable state.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 9022A. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 9022B. If a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of stored first special figures is less than the predetermined upper limit value, the first start is performed. The condition is met. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the number of reserved memory of the second special figure is less than the predetermined upper limit value, the second start is performed. The condition is met.

A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the ordinary winning ball device 906A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball device 907 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door, and the large winning opening door changes between an open state and a closed state. Form the mouth.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening, and the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening. .. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. To do. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the big winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has entered the grand prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 9023. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball enters the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the game ball enters another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out. Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball, and the game is played more than in the first state. It becomes a second state that is disadvantageous to the person.

A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 902. As an example, the ordinary symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs or the like like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. For example, a plurality of types different from the special symbol are used. The normal symbol, which is the identification information, is displayed in a variable manner, and the display result is derived and displayed at the end of the variable display. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is called a normal symbol game. Above the normal symbol display 9020, the normal symbol hold display 9025C is provided. The normal figure hold display 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 9041 formed in the game area.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball, and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be done. In this case, a predetermined number of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings are detected by the predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 903, and game effect lamps 909 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 909 includes an LED. At the lower right position of the game machine frame 903, a ball striking operation handle operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward a game area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation by the player or the like.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 903 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. A plate is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903, a lower plate is provided to hold the surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

A stick controller 9031A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation stick held by the player, and has a trigger button at a predetermined position of the operation stick. The trigger button may be configured so that a player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger while the operating rod of the stick controller 9031A is grasped by the operating hand. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button may be built in the operation stick.

A controller sensor unit 9035A including a tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operation stick may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 9031A. For example, the tilting direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photo sensors arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 901. It is configured to include four transmissive photosensors that combine two transmissive photosensors arranged perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player's side. Just do it. The controller sensor unit 9035A outputs a signal corresponding to the operation to the stick controller 9031A to the effect control board 9012 of FIG. 21.

The member forming the upper plate is provided with a push button 9031B, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate main body, which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like. The push button 9031B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player. Inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 9031B, a push sensor 9035B that mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detects the operation action of the player performed on the push button 9031B is provided. You just have to. The push sensor 9035B outputs a signal corresponding to the operation to the push button 9031B to the effect control board 9012 of FIG.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 or the like for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, a touch sensor board, a power supply board, etc. are arranged on the back surface of the game board of the pachinko game machine 901. ..

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The main board 9011 mainly sends a command to a control board on the sub side including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of receiving a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012 or the like. It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 9011 controls the lighting / extinguishing of the LEDs and the like constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to control the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. It also has a function of controlling the variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the normal game by the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 9020. Further, the main board 9011 also has a function of controlling the first hold indicator 9025A, the second hold indicator 9025B, the normal figure hold indicator 9025C, and the like to display various hold storage numbers.

For example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like are mounted on the main board 9011. The switch circuit 90110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting the game ball and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100. The various switches may have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a switch called a sensor. The solenoid circuit 90111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 9082 for the winning door.

The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives an image display device 905, speakers 908L, and 908R. , Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electric parts such as the game effect lamp 909 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 has a function of performing a display operation on the image display device 905, an audio output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a lighting / extinguishing operation on the game effect lamp 909, that is, an electric component for the effect. It has a function to control and execute a predetermined effect operation. Further, the effect control board 9012 has a function of detecting an operation on the stick controller 9031A based on a signal from the controller sensor unit 9035A and a function of detecting an operation on the push button 9031B based on a signal from the push sensor 9035B. It also has a function of causing the electric component for the effect to execute the effect operation according to the detected operation.

The audio control board 9013 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is an audio signal for outputting audio from the speakers 908L and 908R based on the signal from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes processing.

The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for controlling lamp output provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is a lamp that drives on / off of the game effect lamp 909 or the like based on a signal from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a driver circuit and the like.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted as an electric signal. Each of the effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, in which the first byte represents MODE and the second byte represents EXT. The first bit of the MODE data may be set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data may be set to "0" in advance.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM 90101 that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a RAM 90102 that provides a work area for game control. The computer 90103 includes a CPU 90103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, a random number circuit 90104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 90103, and an I / O 90105.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 901 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 90101 by the CPU 90103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various variable data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data in which the CPU 90103 is temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. The variable data read operation, the CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

The one-chip microcomputer to be the game control microcomputer 90100 may have at least a RAM 90102 built in in addition to the CPU 90103, and the ROM 90101, the random number circuit 90104, the I / O 90105, and the like may be externally attached.

In the game control microcomputer 90100, for example, a random number circuit 90104 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game. Random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as a random number circuit 90104, or may be updated by software when the CPU 90103 of the game control microcomputer 90100 executes a predetermined computer program. You may. For example, numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is stored in a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 90102, and the CPU 90103 The random value may be updated by updating the stored value periodically or irregularly.

The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 90101 includes table data constituting a plurality of command transmission tables used by the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The constituent table data and the like are stored.

In the RAM 90102 included in the game control microcomputer 90100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are temporarily stored in a rewritable manner.

The I / O 90105 is configured to include, for example, an input port for inputting various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100. To.

The effect control board 9012 includes an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 90122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 90120, and an image display device. A random number circuit that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the 905 and the sub-image display device 9051 and the effect control CPU 90120. 90124 and I / O 90125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121 to execute the process of controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 90121, the effect control CPU 90120 writes various variation data to the RAM 90122 and temporarily stores the variation data, and the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the RAM 90122. Variable data read operation to read various temporarily stored variable data, reception operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 9012 via the I / O 90125, and the effect control CPU 90120 is I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via O90125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 90120, ROM 90121, and RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

In the effect control board 9012, for example, a random number circuit 90124 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation. The random number used to control such an effect operation is also called an effect random number. The effect random number may be updated by hardware such as a random number circuit 90124, like the game random number used on the main board 9011, or the effect control CPU 90120 executes a predetermined computer program. It may be updated by software.

The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 21 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 90121 contains a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is a collection of data for executing various effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and reach effects. For example, the effect control execution data and the end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value are displayed. It is composed of included process data, is configured by combining pattern data, and is set as a usage pattern described later. Further, the pattern data that becomes the effect control pattern as it is is also stored, and the pattern data may be set as the effect control pattern that becomes the use pattern as it is.

The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation.

The display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 outputs a video signal of the effect image to be displayed on the image display device 905 and the sub-image display device 9051 based on the control of the effect control CPU 90120, and outputs the video signal of the effect image to be displayed on the image display device 905. Display the production image on. As an example, the display control unit 90123 may be equipped with VDP, CGROM, VRAM, or the like. The VDP may be a GPU, GCL, or a microprocessor for image processing generally referred to as DSP. The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It may be configured. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 transmits a display control command for designating an effect image to be displayed in the display screen of the image display device 905 to the display control unit 90123 according to the display control data and the like included in the effect control pattern. The display control unit 90123 outputs a video signal for displaying the effect image designated by the display control command by using the data stored in the CGROM or the like in accordance with the display control command from the effect control CPU 90120. As a result, the video signal of the effect image according to the control of the effect control CPU 90120 is output, and the effect image is displayed on the image display device 905.

The I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 has, for example, an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012. And are included. For example, from the output port of the I / O 90125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 905 and the sub-image display device 9051, a control signal transmitted to the audio control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 are transmitted. The control signal, the control signal transmitted to the drive motor 9052, and the like are output. An operation signal corresponding to the operation to the stick controller 9031A is input from the controller sensor unit 9035A to the input port of the I / O 90125, and an operation signal corresponding to the operation to the push button 9031B is input from the push sensor 9035B.

The image display device 905 includes a display panel composed of a liquid crystal panel or the like, a driver circuit for driving the display panel, or the like. The video signal supplied from the display control unit 90123 to the image display device 905 via the I / O 90125 based on the control of the effect control CPU 90120 is input to the driver circuit. The driver circuit drives the display panel based on the input video signal, and displays the image represented by the video signal on the display panel. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the image display device 905.

With the above configuration, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the speakers 908L and 908R via the voice control board 9013 to output voice, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 909 via the lamp control board 9014. Alternatively, various effects are executed by displaying an effect image in the display area of the image display device 905 via the display control unit 90123.

The drive motor 9052 is composed of, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and controls the sub-image display device 9051 to rotate clockwise and counterclockwise by driving according to a drive signal transmitted from the effect control board 9012.

As an example of a game using a game ball, a launch motor included in a predetermined ball launching device based on a predetermined operation of a ball striking operation handle installed at the lower right of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 901. As a result, a game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area.

When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes through the passing gate 9041 and is detected by the gate switch 9021, the normal symbol start condition for executing the normal map game on the normal symbol display 9020 is set based on this detection. To establish. After that, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 9020 is started based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended.

In the normal symbol game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed. At this time, if a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol loss".

In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per normal", the opening control is performed so that the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 906B is in the tilting position, and the predetermined time is set. After that, the closing control to return to the vertical position is performed.

Whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is set to "per normal figure" as a predetermined specific display result depends on the variable display result such as when the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 9020 is started. Is determined before the derivation display. In addition, the variable display period of the normal symbol is also determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed, such as when the normal symbol game is started.

When the game ball that has flowed down the game area enters the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A, the first starting condition is satisfied because the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A. .. After that, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started. Will be done.

Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B. After that, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B starts. Will be done. However, when the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting winning opening.

When the first special figure game is started or the second special figure game is started, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol is set as a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result is determined. It is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result.

After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived. Is displayed.

When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the jackpot gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. Whether or not the variable display game state is controlled corresponds to whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit", and is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As a variable display result of the special symbol, when the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed and the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is "missing".

As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers "3" and "7" is used as a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is used as a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A may be a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. However, the special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 907 is in the first state which is advantageous for the player. Then, a round game is executed in which the large winning opening is continuously opened during a predetermined period or a period until a predetermined number of game balls enter the large winning opening and a winning ball is generated. During the period other than the execution period of such a round game, the large winning opening is closed, and the winning ball is difficult or impossible to be generated. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 9023, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. The round game in the jackpot game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit is reached.

When the variable display result of the special symbol is "big hit", the case where the big hit type is either "non-probable change" or "probable change" is included. For example, as a variable display result of a special symbol, when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "3" is derived and displayed, the jackpot type is "non-probability", and when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "7" is derived and displayed, the jackpot is displayed. The type is "probability change". As a round game in a jackpot game state in which the jackpot type is "probability variation" or "non-probability variation", there are 15 normal open rounds in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 907 to the first state advantageous to the player is a predetermined time. It is executed a predetermined number of times such as rounds. The jackpot game state in which the normal open round is executed is also called the normal open jackpot state. The jackpot game state based on the "big hit" when the jackpot type is "non-probability change" is called "non-probability change jackpot game state". Further, the jackpot game state based on the "big hit" when the jackpot type is "probability change" is called "probability change jackpot game state". The "big hit" when the big hit type is "non-probable change" may be called "non-probable change big hit", and the "big hit" when the big hit type is "probable change" may be called "probable change big hit".

After the jackpot game state ends, the variable display result may be controlled to a probability variation state in which the probability of becoming a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied. Further, after the jackpot game state is completed, the average variable display time may be controlled to a shorter time state than the normal state. The time saving state is controlled so as to continue until one of the predetermined number of special figure games being executed and the next big hit game state being started, whichever of the time saving end conditions is satisfied first. To. In addition, the remaining number of executions of the special figure game until the time saving end condition is satisfied may be referred to as the time saving remaining number of times. The time saving state and the probability change state are advantageous gaming states for the player.

In this embodiment, the game state after the non-probability change jackpot game state ends is a time saving state, but does not become a probability change state. In this embodiment, the gaming state after the probability variation jackpot gaming state ends is the time saving state and the probability variation control.

In the time-saving state, the normally variable winning ball device 906B is set to the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting winning opening than in the non-time-saving state such as the normal state. Change. For example, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol" in each normal symbol game. The tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the fact that the variable display result is "per normal figure" is set to be longer than in the normal state. The normal variable winning ball device 906B may be changed between the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode by the control of lengthening the length and the control of increasing the number of tilts as compared with the normal state. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball device 906B into an open state and a closed state in an advantageous change mode is called a high open control. By being controlled to such a time saving state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened, and the special gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

The normal state is a specific game state such as a big hit game state, or a game state other than a game state that is advantageous to the player such as a time saving state or a probability change state, and the variable display result in the normal drawing game is ". The probability of "hit a normal figure" and the probability of a variable display result in a special figure game becoming a "big hit" are controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The time saving state is also called "high base state", "high base" and the like, and the gaming state that is not the time saving state is also called "low base state", "low base", "non-time saving state", "non-time saving" and the like. The probability change state in which the probability change control is performed is also called "high probability state", "high probability", etc., and the game state that is not the probability change state is "low probability state", "low probability", "non-probability change state", "non-probability change state". It is also called. The gaming state in the probabilistic state and the time saving state is also called "high accuracy high base state", "high accuracy high base" and the like. The gaming state when the time is shortened instead of the probability change state is also called "low probability high base state", "low probability high base state", or the like. The gaming state when the time is not shortened but is in the probabilistic state is also called "high probability low base state", "high probability low base state", or the like. A state that does not become either a time saving state or a probability change state, that is, a normal state is also called a "low probability low base state", a "low probability low base state", or the like.

In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the image display device 905, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A Of the second special figure game on the display device 904B, the variable display of the decorative symbol and the display of the fourth special symbol are started in response to the start of any of the special figure games. In the first special figure game and the second special figure game, when a definite special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol is derived and displayed, the "left" of the image display device 905 is synchronized with the timing of the derived display. In the "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, and the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode. Here, the reach mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 form a part of the jackpot combination, the decorative symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continue to fluctuate. It is a display mode in which all or a part of the decorative symbols are changed in synchronization while forming all or a part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the decorative symbols that make up the predetermined jackpot combination are still displayed when they are stopped. In the remaining decorative symbol display area that is not stopped, the decorative symbol is fluctuating, or all or part of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". This is a display mode in which the decorative symbols are changed in synchronization while forming all or a part of the jackpot combination.

During the variable display of the decorative symbol, a character image different from the decorative symbol is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905, a background image is displayed, and a moving image different from the decorative symbol is reproduced and displayed. The production is executed. These effects are called the variable display in-process effect together with the variable display of the decorative pattern itself. That is, the effect during variable display is an effect using an image displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 along with the variable display of the special symbol, and is a concept including the variable display itself of the decorative symbol. In this way, the effect during variable display is executed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. Making the variable display mode a reach mode is also one of the effects during the variable display. In the variable display effect, in addition to the effect of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 along with the variable display of the special symbol, the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation by the game effect lamp 909, etc. Or the like may be included.

A reach effect may be executed as a part of the above-mentioned variable display effect. The reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode. The reach effect is to reduce the fluctuation speed of the decorative pattern, display a character image different from the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 905, change the display mode of the background image, or move the image different from the decorative pattern. By reproducing and displaying the image or changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, the effect is different from that before the reach mode. In this embodiment, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B are prepared as reach effects. In this embodiment, the jackpot expectation when each reach effect is executed is higher in the order of super reach B, super reach A, and normal reach. The jackpot expectation is, for example, the ratio at which the variable display result of the special symbol is "big hit", and here, the ratio at which the variable display result of the decorative symbol is "big hit". Hereinafter, when referring to the jackpot expectation of a special figure game, the jackpot expectation includes the ratio of the variable display result of the decorative symbol being "big hit".

Further, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, the so-called look-ahead notice is executed based on the determination at the time of starting winning. The look-ahead notice is a notice of the jackpot expectation of the special figure game that is the target of the look-ahead determination. In this embodiment, as a look-ahead notice, a hold change effect is prepared in which a predetermined image acts on the hold display image of the target to change the display mode of the hold display image. The hold change effect is executed during the execution of the variable display effect corresponding to the special figure game executed before the target. The hold change effect may be executed a plurality of times. In this case, the hold change effect is executed once for each of a plurality of variable displays of continuous or non-consecutive jumps, and the final of the hold display image of the target. The expected degree of big hit is announced by the display mode. The look-ahead notice is regarded as an effect separate from the variable display effect, but may be a part of the variable display effect.

When the variable display result of the special symbol is "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 905. As an example, the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", so that a big hit combination is confirmed. It suffices if the decorative pattern is derived and displayed. The decorative design that is stopped and displayed may differ depending on the jackpot type.

When the variable display result of the special symbol is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, and the decorative symbol constituting the predetermined non-reach combination stops as the variable display result of the decorative symbol. By being displayed, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-specific display result may be derived and displayed. Further, when the variable display result of the special symbol is "missing", as the variable display result of the decorative symbol, after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a big hit combination is configured. When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a fixed decorative symbol that results in a non-specific display may be derived and displayed.

Next, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 will be described. The main board 9011 controls the progress of the game. Then, the main board 9011 transmits an effect control command to the effect control board 9012 according to the progress of the game. The effect control board 9012 performs various effects by executing effect control that controls the image display device 905 or the like based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011. As a result, the game executed by the main board 9011 and the various effects executed by the effect control board 9012 are synchronized. Hereinafter, the main effect control commands will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number.

The command 8001 (H) is an effect control command that specifies the start of the first special figure game, that is, the start of the variable display of the first special figure. The command 8002 (H) is an effect control command that specifies the start of the second special figure game, that is, the start of the variable display of the second special figure. The first fluctuation start designation command and the second fluctuation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a fluctuation start designation command. Information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special figure or the variable display of the second special figure may be included in the variation pattern designation command described later. The fluctuation start designation command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

The command 81XX (H) is an effect control command for designating a variable display for a variable display of a special symbol or a variable display of a decorative symbol. A numerical value corresponding to each fluctuation pattern is set in "XX" of the command. Further, the variation pattern specification command may also be a command for designating the variation start of the decorative symbol. The variation pattern specification command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

The command 8CXX (H) is an effect control command for designating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit. In this embodiment, display result specification commands corresponding to the variable display results are set. For example, a numerical value corresponding to the display result is set in "XX" in the command. The display result specification command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command for designating the end of the special figure game. The symbol confirmation specification command specifies that the variable display of the decorative symbol is terminated and the display result is derived and displayed. The symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted at the end of the special symbol game.

The command 95XX (H) is an effect control command for designating the background of the effect image displayed on the image display device 905. In this embodiment, the background is changed according to the gaming state. Therefore, the background designation command also specifies the game state. A numerical value corresponding to the background is set in "XX" in the command. The background designation command is transmitted at the timing when the game state can be changed, at the start of the special figure game, and the like.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state. The fanfare is executed at the start of the jackpot game state. It is a production that notifies that the jackpot game state has been reached. This command is sent at the start of the jackpot game state.

The command A300 (H) is an effect control command for designating the end of the jackpot game state. The ending is an effect of notifying the end of the big hit game state, which is executed at the end of the big hit game state. This command is sent at the end of the last round game.

The command B100 (H) is an effect control command for designating that the first start winning is generated due to the game medium entering the first starting winning opening. The command B200 (H) is an effect control command for designating that the second start winning is generated due to the game medium entering the second starting winning opening. The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command. The start prize designation command is transmitted when the start prize occurs.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command for designating that the first start winning prize is generated and the number of reserved first special figures is increased by one. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the second start winning prize is generated and the number of the second special figure reserved storage is increased by one. These commands may be collectively referred to as special figure hold memory addition designation commands. The special figure hold memory addition designation command is transmitted when a start winning prize occurs.

The command C200 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the number of stored first special figures is reduced by one when the first special figure game is executed. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the number of the second special figure reserved storage is reduced by one when the second special figure game is executed. These commands may be collectively referred to as special figure hold memory subtraction specification commands. The special figure hold storage number subtraction specification command is transmitted at the start of the special figure game.

The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command for designating the determination result of the look-ahead determination at the time of starting winning. As will be described in detail later, when the first start prize or the second start prize occurs, the random numbers MR'1 to MR3'used to determine whether or not to make a big hit, the big hit type, and the fluctuation pattern are determined. Be extracted. In this embodiment, for the special figure game corresponding to the extracted random number values MR1'to MR3', among the extracted random number values MR1'to MR3' before the start condition of the special figure game is satisfied. Based on the random number value MR1'of, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the special figure game becomes a "big hit". The look-ahead determination refers to this determination, and the look-ahead determination is performed by the winning random number value determination process in step S90211 described later. The judgment result of the look-ahead judgment is set to "XX" in the judgment result specification command at the time of winning. The winning judgment result specification command is transmitted when the starting winning is generated.

Next, the main operation of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment will be described. In the following, the operation will be described with reference to a flowchart or the like, but in each operation, a process or the like that does not appear in the flowchart may be appropriately performed.

On the main board 9011, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is started, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process which is, for example, the game control main process. In the game control main process, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings and the like after setting interrupt disable.

When the CPU 90103 that executes the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC supplied every predetermined period and receives the interrupt request, it sets the interrupt disabled state, for example, a predetermined game control timer interrupt. Execute the process.

In the game control timer interrupt processing, the CPU 90103 performs games in the pachinko gaming machine 901 such as switch processing, main side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, special symbol process processing, ordinary symbol process processing, and command control processing. Executes the process for controlling the progress of. At the end of the game control timer interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state is set. As a result, the game control timer interrupt processing is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs, that is, every predetermined time, which is the supply interval of the interrupt request signal.

In the switch processing, each switch determines whether a detection signal has been input from various switches such as a gate switch 9021, a first start port switch 9022A, a second start port switch 9022B, and a count switch 9023 via a switch circuit 90110. This is a process of determining whether or not the switch is turned on for each switch and storing the determination result in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102. The determination result stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is used in the special symbol process process and the normal symbol process process described later.

The error processing on the main side is a processing in which an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result.

The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example.

The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the side of the main board 9011 by software. As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side include a random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern. And should be included.

The random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state, and is "0". It can take any value from "65535".

The random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "probability variation" or "non-probability variation" when the variable display result is "big hit". It can take any value from "0" to "99".

The random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random number value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance, and is "0". It can take any value of ~ "99".

In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 901, and the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special symbol game is set as a "big hit". Determining whether or not to control the game state, determining the jackpot type and fluctuation pattern, controlling the display operation on the special symbol display device 904 based on the determination result, and winning the jackpot game state special variable winning ball device 907. Various processes are selected and executed in order to set the opening / closing operation of the mouth in a predetermined procedure. The details of the special symbol process processing will be described later, but by executing the special symbol process processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern are determined, the special symbol game is executed based on the result, and the jackpot game state. Etc. are realized.

In the normal symbol process processing, for example, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 9041, if the number of holds does not reach the upper limit, the hold storage of the normal figure game is performed, or the hold memory is used to variably display the normal symbol game. The result and fluctuation pattern can be determined, the display operation on the normal symbol display 9020 can be controlled according to the fluctuation pattern to execute the variable display of the normal symbol, and the variable display result of the normal symbol game can be derived and displayed. In the case of "per normal drawing", a process of opening the normally variable winning ball device 906B is performed. By executing the normal symbol process process each time a timer interrupt occurs, the normal symbol game can be executed, and the normal variable winning ball device 906B can be opened for a predetermined period when the normal symbol is hit.

The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 9011 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 9012. As an example, in the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process, etc., the transmission setting of the control command is performed, and in the command control process, the process of actually transmitting the control command set to be transmitted to the effect control board 9012 is performed. Will be done.

Next, the special figure process processing will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S90101.

When the start winning winning determination process is started, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the first starting opening switch 9022A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A is turned on ( Step S90201). For example, when the determination result that the first start port switch 9022A is determined to be in the ON state in the switch processing is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, the first start port switch 9022A is ON. You just have to judge. When the first start port switch 9022A is turned on (step S90201; YES), whether or not the number of reserved first special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved storages of the first special figure game, is a predetermined upper limit value. Is determined (step S90202). At this time, the CPU 90103 specifies the first special figure reserved storage number by reading the first special figure reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first special figure reserved storage number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102. I hope I can. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; NO), the start port buffer value which is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is set to "1". Set (step S90203).

When the first start port switch 9022A is off in step S90201 (step S90201; NO), or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; YES), it is normal. It is determined whether or not the second start opening switch 9022B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 906B is turned on (step S90204). For example, when the determination result that the second start port switch 9022B is determined to be in the ON state in the switch processing is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, the second start port switch 9022B is ON. You just have to judge. When it is determined that the second start port switch 9022B is on (step S90204; YES), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the second special figure game, becomes a predetermined upper limit value. Whether or not it is determined (step S90205). At this time, the CPU 90103 specifies the second special figure reserved storage number by reading the second special figure reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second special figure reserved storage number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102. I hope I can. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step S90205 (step S90205; NO), the start port buffer value is set to "2" (step S90206). If the second start port switch 9022B is not turned on (step S90204; NO), or if the second special figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value (step S90205; YES), the start winning determination process is terminated.

After executing any of the processes of steps S90203 and S90206, the hold storage count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be added by 1 (step S90207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the 1st special figure hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the 2nd special figure hold memory count value is added. Add 1 In this way, the first special figure reserved memory count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the first starting condition for the game ball to enter the first starting winning opening is satisfied. Further, the second special figure reserved memory count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the second start condition for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is satisfied. At this time, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, is updated so as to be added by 1 (step S90208).

After executing the process of step S90208, the CPU 90103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize (step S90209). As an example, in the process of step S90209, among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 90104 or the random counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination are used. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2'and the random number value MR3' for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored as hold data by being set at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S90210). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. 25 (A). On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. 25 (B). When the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 90103 controls the first hold display 9025A to display a display capable of specifying the number of the first special figure hold storage added by one. You may let the first hold indicator 9025A do it. When the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 90103 controls the second hold display 9025B to display a display capable of specifying the number of the second special figure hold storage added by one. The second hold indicator 9025B may be allowed to perform this.

The first special figure reservation storage unit shown in FIG. 25 (A) has not been started yet, although the game ball has entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the first starting winning has been generated. Stores the hold data of the first special figure game. As an example, the first special figure hold storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order of winning in the first start winning opening, and the CPU 90103 extracts from the random number circuit 90104 or the like based on the establishment of the first start condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2' for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern are reserved data, and the stored number is a predetermined upper limit value. Remember until you reach. In this embodiment, in this way, the first special figure game that has not yet been started is stored as a hold memory.

The second special figure reservation storage unit shown in FIG. 25 (B) is still started although the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B and the second starting winning is generated. Stores the pending data of the second special figure game. As an example, the second special figure hold storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order of winning in the second start winning opening, and the CPU 90103 extracts from the random number circuit 90104 or the like based on the establishment of the second start condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2' for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern are set as pending data, and the number reaches a predetermined upper limit. Remember until you reach it. In this embodiment, in this way, the second special figure game that has not yet been started is stored as a hold memory.

After that, the random number value determination process at the time of winning is executed (step S90211). FIG. 26A is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process. In the prize-winning random number value determination process, the CPU 90103 first sets the transmission of the first start prize designation command if the start port buffer value is "1", and then transmits the first special figure hold storage number addition designation command. If the setting is made and the start port buffer value is "2", the transmission setting of the second start winning prize designation command is made, and then the transmission setting of the second special figure reserved storage number addition designation command is performed (step S90401).

Next, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the current jackpot game state is present (step S90402). Whether or not the current jackpot game state is present can be specified by, for example, the value of the special figure process flag described later. Here, if it is "4" to "7", it is in the big hit game state. When the value of the special figure process flag is other than "4" to "7" and the jackpot game state is not in progress (step S90402; NO), it is determined whether or not the current time is shortened (step S9403). Whether or not the current state is the time saving state may be specified by the state of the time saving flag. When the time saving flag is on and the current time saving state is in the time saving state (step S9403; YES), it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “2” (step S90404).

When the start port buffer value is "2" (step S90404; YES), or when the time saving state is not in progress (step S90403; NO), the CPU 90103 is held this time based on the random number value MR1'extracted in step S90209. It is determined whether or not the display result of the special figure game is a "big hit" (step S90405). In the determination, the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table, which is referred to when determining the special figure display result at the start of the special figure game, is referred to. In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 28, a numerical value compared with the random number value MR1'is a" big hit "or" It suffices if it is assigned to "loss". When the gaming state is not the probabilistic state, the first special figure display result determination table is referred to, and when the game state is the probabilistic state, the second special figure display result determination table is referred to. Whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state may be specified based on the probabilistic flag provided in the RAM 90102 and turned on in the probabilistic state.

In step S90405, the CPU 90103 sets a range of determined values assigned to "big hit" in the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table as the big hit determination range. In the probable change state, "8000" to "9899" are set as the jackpot determination range, and in the non-probability change state, "8000" to "8189" are set as the jackpot determination range. Then, it is determined whether or not the random value MR1'of this time is within the set jackpot determination range.

When the random value MR1'this time is within the jackpot judgment range and it is determined that the special figure display result of the special figure game held this time is "big hit" (step S90405; YES), the jackpot is designated as the judgment result. Set the transmission of the winning determination result specification command (step S90406). Since "02" of the EXT data is set in the jackpot determination result (see FIG. 26B), the transmission setting of the winning determination result designation command including the data in the EXT data is performed.

When it is determined that the random number value MR1'is not within the jackpot judgment range and the special figure display result of the special figure game held this time is "missing" (step S90405; NO), when the winning is specified as the judgment result. Set the transmission of the determination result specification command (step S90407). Since "01" of the EXT data is set in the loss determination result (see FIG. 26B), the transmission setting of the winning determination result designation command including the data in the EXT data is performed.

When the value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7" and the jackpot game state is in progress (step S90402; YES), or when the start port buffer value is "1" (step S90404; NO), the look-ahead notice In order to limit the execution of the above, the transmission setting of the winning determination result specification command for designating no determination as the determination result is performed (step S90408). As a result, the execution of the look-ahead notice is restricted on the effect control board 9012 side. Since "00" of the EXT data is set in the determination result without the determination (see FIG. 26B), the transmission setting of the winning determination result designation command including the data in the EXT data is performed.

By restricting the execution of the look-ahead effect for the first start-up prize in the time-saving state and the start-up prize in the big hit game state, it is possible to prevent the execution of the look-ahead effect at an inappropriate timing.

After steps S90406, S90407, and S90408, the winning random number value determination process ends.

In addition, one set of each command set to be transmitted in the process is collectively transmitted in the subsequent command control process as a command at the time of starting winning. The set of the 1st start prize designation command, the 1st special figure hold memory number addition designation command, and the prize judgment result designation command is called the 1st start prize designation command, and the 2nd start prize designation command and the 2nd special figure hold. The set of the memory number addition designation command and the winning judgment result designation command is called the second start winning command.

Returning to FIG. 26, after the winning random number value determination process in step S9021, the CPU 90103 determines whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S90212). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step S90212; "2"), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S90213), and then the start prize is won. The judgment process ends. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "1" (step S90212; "1"), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S90214). The process proceeds to step S90204. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S90101 shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 90103 selects one of the processes of steps S90110 to S90117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102. And execute.

The special symbol normal processing in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90110 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol hold storage number is “0” (step S90231). The CPU 90103 may determine whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number count value is "0".

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step S90231 (step S90231; NO), the hold data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, for example, the head area of the second special figure hold storage unit. The numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out (step S90232). As a result, the game random numbers extracted in the process of step S90209 corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning at the second starting winning opening are read out. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S90232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding memory count value and updating, the second special figure holding storage number is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure is updated. The storage content in the hold storage unit is shifted (step S90233). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number "1" in the second special figure hold storage unit is shifted upward one entry at a time. Further, in the process of step S90233, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, is updated to "2" (step S90234).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step S90231 (step S90231; YES), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step S90235). The CPU 90103 may determine whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number count value is "0". As described above, the process of step S90235 is executed when the second special figure reserved storage number is determined to be "0" in step S90231, and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the execution of the second special figure game is started with priority over the first special figure game.

When the number of reserved first special figures is other than "0" in step S90235 (step S90235; NO), the reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102, for example, the head area of the first special figure reserved storage unit. The numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out (step S90236). As a result, the game random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start prize at the first start prize opening in the process of step S90209 are read out. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S90236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the count value of the first special figure reserved storage number and updating it, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure is updated. The storage content in the hold storage unit is shifted (step S90237). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number "1" in the first special figure hold storage unit is shifted upward one entry at a time. Further, in the process of step S90237, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S90238).

After executing any of the processes of steps S90234 and S90238, the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is determined to be either "big hit" or "loss" (step S90239). As an example, in the process of step S90239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 90101 in advance is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the special figure display result. For example, the CPU 90103 sets the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 28 (A) as a table to be used when the current state is in the non-probable change state, and the CPU 90103 sets the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 28 (A) as a table to be used. 2 Set the special figure display result determination table as the table to be used. In each special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 28, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the "big hit" or "loss" that is the determination result. I just need to be there.

The CPU 90103 reads numerical data indicating a random number value MR1'for determining a special figure display result included in the game random number temporarily stored in the variable random number buffer in step S9022 or S90236 from the variable random number buffer, and reads the random number value MR1. Refer to the first or second special figure display result determination table set as the used table based on the numerical data indicating ′, and match the random number value MR1 ′ in the reference first or second special figure display result determination table. The "big hit" or "loss" assigned to the determined value may be determined as the result of displaying the special figure this time. When the random number value MR1'is "9000", the CPU 90103 determines that the special figure display result is set to "big hit" by referring to the second special figure display result determination table when the probability change flag is on. , When the probability change flag is off, it is determined that the special figure display result is set to "miss" by referring to the first special figure display result determination table.

As shown in FIG. 28, in the probabilistic state, the special figure display result is determined as a "big hit" at a higher determination rate than in the non-probability state. Therefore, for example, the current state is the probability change state based on the fact that the probability change flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the jackpot type is "probability change" by the big hit end process of step S90117 shown in FIG. Occasionally, the special figure display result is more likely to be a "big hit" and a big hit game state is more likely to occur than in the non-probability change state. That is, it is advantageous for the player when the present is in a probabilistic state.

After that, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S90239 is a "big hit" (step S90240). When the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S90240; YES), the big hit flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is set to the on state (step S90241). Further, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S90242). As an example, in the process of step S90242, a jackpot type determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 90101 is selected and set as a table used for determining the jackpot type. For example, the CPU 90103 sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 29 as the table to be used. In the jackpot type determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 29, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type may be assigned to "non-probability variation" or "probability variation" as the determination result. ..

The CPU 90103 reads the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random number value MR2'included in the game random number temporarily stored in the variable random number buffer in step S9022 or S90236 from the variable random number buffer and reads it from the variable random number buffer. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type, the jackpot type determination table set in the used table is referred to, and the determined value that matches the random number value MR2'is assigned in the referenced jackpot type determination table. The "non-probability change" or "probability change" may be determined as the jackpot type this time.

After executing the process of step S90242, the determined jackpot type is stored (step S90243). The CPU 90103 may store the jackpot type by storing the jackpot type buffer setting value indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

When the special symbol display result is not "big hit" (step S90240; NO), or after step S90243, a definite special symbol which is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is determined (step S90244). As an example, when it is determined in step S90240 that the special symbol display result is not a "big hit", a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol is determined as a final special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S90240 that the special symbol display result is "big hit", any of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of jackpot symbols is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type in step S90242. It may be decided as a definite special symbol.

After executing the process of step S90244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" (step S90245), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "1" in step S90245, the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S90111 is executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

If the number of reserved storages of the first special figure game is "0" in step S90235 (step S90235; YES), the predetermined demo display setting is made (step S90246), and then the special symbol normal processing ends. .. In this demo display setting, is the effect control command for designating the start of the demonstration display by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 905, for example, transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012? Judge whether or not. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the demo display start specification command is set to be transmitted, and then the demo display setting is terminated. The effect control board 9012 displays the demo screen when the demo display start designation command is transmitted.

The fluctuation pattern setting process in step S90111 in FIG. 23 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90111 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S90261). Then, when the jackpot flag is on (step S90261; YES), the jackpot variation pattern is determined with reference to the jackpot variation pattern determination table (step S90262). When the jackpot flag is off (step S90261; NO), the loss time variation pattern is determined with reference to the loss variation pattern determination table (step S90263).

FIG. 31 shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, fluctuation patterns PA1'-1, PA2'-1, PA3'-2 to PA3'-4 are prepared as fluctuation patterns at the time of loss. Further, as the jackpot fluctuation pattern, fluctuation patterns PB3'-2 to PB3'-4 are prepared.

The fluctuation patterns PA1'-1 and PA2'-1 among the fluctuation patterns at the time of loss are non-reach fluctuation patterns that specify non-reach. The variation pattern PA2'-1 is a non-reach variation pattern for shortening the time when the special figure variation time is shorter than usual. The fluctuation patterns PA3'-2 to PA3'-4 among the fluctuation patterns at the time of loss are reach fluctuation patterns that specify the reach. The variation pattern PA3'-2 is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PA3'-3 is a reach variation pattern that specifies the development from the execution of the normal reach to the super reach A. The variation pattern PA3'-4 is a reach variation pattern that specifies the development from the execution of the normal reach to the super reach B.

The fluctuation pattern PB3'-2 among the jackpot fluctuation patterns is a reach fluctuation pattern that specifies the execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PB3'-3 is a reach variation pattern that specifies the development from the execution of the normal reach to the super reach A. The variation pattern PB3'-4 is a reach variation pattern that specifies the development from the execution of the normal reach to the super reach B.

In step S90262, for example, the jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 32 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 32, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to any of the jackpot fluctuation patterns that will be the determination result. In step S90262, the CPU 90103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number value MR3'read from the variation random number buffer, and in the jackpot variation pattern determination table to be referred to. Any one of the fluctuation patterns PB3'-2 to PB3'-4 assigned to the determination value matching the random number value MR3'may be determined as the current jackpot fluctuation pattern.

In FIG. 32, the determination ratio is shown instead of the range of determination values. In the actual table, the determination values in the range corresponding to the determination ratio in FIG. 32 may be assigned to each variation pattern. For example, in FIG. 32, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PB3'-2 is 10/100, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PB3'-3 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PB3'-4 is 70 /. Since it is 100, the fluctuation pattern PB3'-2 is assigned a decision value 0 to 9 to be compared with the random value MR3', and the fluctuation pattern PB3'-3 is assigned a decision value 10 to 29 to be compared with the random value MR3'. The variation pattern PB3'-4 is assigned a determination value 30 to 99 to be compared with the random value MR3'. The same is true for other tables that describe the decision rate.

In step S90263, when the current gaming state is the non-time saving state, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 33A is referred to. When the current gaming state is the time saving state, the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 33 (B) is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the first and second loss fluctuation pattern determination tables, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR3'for determination of the fluctuation pattern is one of the loss-time fluctuation patterns that is the determination result. It suffices if it is assigned. In step S90263, the CPU 90103 uses either the first or second loss variation pattern determination table set as the usage pattern based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number value MR3'read from the variation random number buffer. Any of the variation patterns PA1'-1, PA3'-2 to PA3'-4 assigned to the determination value matching the random number MR3'in the first or second loss variation pattern determination table to be referred to. Alternatively, any of the fluctuation patterns PA2'-1, PA3'-2 to PA3'-4 may be determined as the current fluctuation pattern at the time of loss.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss shown in FIG. 33, the variation pattern PA2'-1 having a short special figure variation time is easily selected in the time saving state, and is averaged in the time saving state as compared with the non-time saving state. Variable display time can be shortened to suppress the occurrence of invalid start winnings, and it is possible to reduce the player from stopping the launch of the game ball. In addition, the execution frequency of the variable display can be increased.

With reference to FIGS. 32 and 33, at the time of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PB3'-4 for executing super reach B, the fluctuation pattern PB3'-3 for executing super reach A, and the fluctuation pattern PB3'-2 for executing normal reach are in that order. The decision rate is high. The high and low of the determination rate of each fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is the opposite. For this reason, when Super Reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" at the highest rate. Then, in the order of Super Reach A and Normal Reach, the ratio of the variable display result becoming a "big hit" decreases.

After executing step S90262 or S90263, the special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is set (step S90264). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. The special symbol variation time is specified by each variation pattern, and the CPU 90103 changes the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol by setting the special symbol variation time specified by the variation pattern selected in the process of step S90262 or S90263. The timing at which the display result is derived can be set. The special figure fluctuation time is set, for example, by setting a timer value according to the special figure fluctuation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

Following the process of step S90264, one of the first special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 904B for which the start condition is satisfied. Is set to start the fluctuation of the special symbol so as to start (step S90265). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B. When the CPU 90103 starts the first special figure game, the CPU 90103 controls the first hold indicator 9025A to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted first special figure hold storage number by the first hold indicator 9025A. May be done. Further, when the second special figure game is started, the CPU 90103 controls the second hold display 9025B to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted second special figure hold storage number 9025B. May be done.

After that, in order to notify the effect control board 9012 side of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the variation pattern, and the like, the command transmission setting at the start of the variation of the special symbol is set (step S90266). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the display result designation command, and the background designation command are used as the fluctuation start command corresponding to the first special figure game. , 1st special figure Set the transmission for sequentially transmitting the reserved storage number subtraction specification command. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the second fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the display result designation command, and the background designation command are used as the fluctuation start command corresponding to the second special figure game. , 2nd special figure Set the transmission for sequentially transmitting the reserved storage number subtraction specification command. These commands are sequentially transmitted by one timer interrupt in the subsequent command control process.

After executing the process of step S90266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" (step S90267), and then the variation pattern setting process ends. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S90267, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed.

The special symbol variation process in step S90112 of FIG. 23 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time set in step S9011 has elapsed. For example, by subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer whose initial value is set in step S90111 and determining whether or not the subtracted timer value becomes "0", whether or not the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed. It may be judged whether or not. When the timer value of the game control process timer is not 0, the special figure fluctuation time has not elapsed. Therefore, the first special symbol display device 904A or the first special symbol display device 904A or the like by performing control for executing the variable display of the special figure in the special figure game. The second special symbol display device 904B performs a process for changing the special symbol, and ends the special symbol variation process. On the other hand, when the timer value of the game control process timer becomes 0 and the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display The device 904B controls to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, stops and displays the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol, sets the transmission of the symbol confirmation designation command, and sets the value of the special symbol process flag to "3". Update to. By repeatedly executing step S90112 when a timer interrupt occurs, variable display of the special symbol, derivation display of the confirmed special symbol, and the like are realized.

The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 90103 determines whether the jackpot flag is on. When the jackpot flag is on, the time saving flag and the probability change flag are reset, and the count value of the time saving number of times, which is provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 and counts the remaining number of times of the variable display executed during the time saving state, is set. The process of resetting to "0" is performed. Then, the timer value corresponding to the fanfare waiting time is set in the game control process timer as the initial value. Then, "15" is set as an initial value in the round number counter for counting the round games provided in the RAM 90102. After that, the setting to send the hit start designation command is made, the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", and the special symbol stop processing is terminated. Since the game state may be changed here, the background specification command may be set to be transmitted.

When the jackpot flag is off, it is determined whether the time reduction flag is on, and when it is on, the count value of the time reduction counter is subtracted by "1". After that, it is determined whether the count value after subtracting "1" is "0", and if the count value is "0", the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. Turn off the time saving flag to finish. After that, set the transmission to send the background specification command based on the state of the probability change flag. If the time saving flag is off, the count value after subtracting "1" is not "0", or after setting the background specification command transmission, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". The special symbol stop process is terminated.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this jackpot opening pre-processing, for example, the timer value of the game control process timer is subtracted. If the timer value after subtraction is not "0", it means that the fanfare waiting time has not yet elapsed, so that the jackpot opening pre-processing ends. When the timer value after subtraction is "0", the fanfare waiting time has elapsed and it is the start timing of the round game. In this case, the process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit game state to open the big winning opening, and setting the timer value corresponding to the upper limit of the period for keeping the big winning opening open in the game control process timer. Processing etc. is executed. When the process of opening the large winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". By repeating step S90114 each time a timer interrupt occurs, waiting until the start timing of the round game, opening of the big winning opening, and the like are realized.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the timer value of the game control process timer is subtracted by 1, the timer value after the subtraction is 1, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023 in one round game, and the like. Based on this, a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included.

When it is determined that the timer value after subtracting 1 becomes 0 or the number of detected game balls reaches a predetermined number, it is time to close the big winning opening, so the big winning opening is closed. The process of returning to the game control process timer, the process of setting the timer value corresponding to the closing time of the big winning opening to the game control process timer, the process of subtracting the count value of the round number counter by 1, and the like are executed. If the timer value after subtracting 1 does not become 0 and the number of detected game balls does not reach the predetermined number, a process for maintaining the open state of the big winning opening is performed to open the big hit. End the intermediate processing. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the process during the big hit opening process is terminated.

By repeating step S90115 each time a timer interrupt occurs, the open state of the large winning opening is maintained until the timing of returning the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state, and finally the large winning opening is closed.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this jackpot release post-processing, processing for determining whether or not the count value of the round number counter has become "0", processing for decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 when it has not become "0", etc. Will be done.

If it is determined that the count value of the round number counter is "0", it means that the round game has reached the upper limit number of times. Therefore, the timer value corresponding to the ending waiting time doctor is set to the game control process timer in the game control process. Set to timer. In addition, the setting to send the hit end specification command is set, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7".

When the timer value of the game control process timer is decremented by 1, it is determined whether the timer value after decrementing by 1 is 0. If it is not 0, it is not the start timing of the round game, so the closed state. Is maintained, and the post-processing after opening the jackpot ends. If it is 0, it is the start timing of the round game, so the timer value corresponding to the process of opening the large winning opening and the upper limit of the period of opening the large winning opening is set in the game control process timer. Processing etc. is executed. When the process of opening the large winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is set to "5".

Each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S90115 and S90116 for each timer interrupt after the big winning opening is opened in step S90114.

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a process of decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 is performed. If the timer value decremented by 1 is not 0, the ending has not been completed, so the jackpot end processing is terminated as it is. When the timer value subtracted by 1 becomes 0, the ending ends, so the states of the time reduction flag, the time reduction count counter, the probability change flag, and the like are set according to the jackpot type stored in the jackpot type buffer.

For example, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the jackpot type is "probability change", and if it is a probabilistic change, turns on the time saving flag and the probability change flag, and counts the initial value in the time saving number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102. Is set to "100". If the jackpot type is "non-probability change", only the time saving flag is turned on, and "100" is set as the initial count value in the time saving number counter. After that, various data such as the game control process timer, the jackpot type buffer set value, and the states of various flags are appropriately reset, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

Next, the main operations of the effect control board 9012 will be described.

In the effect control board 9012, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute, for example, a predetermined effect control main process. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process to clear the RAM 90122, set various initial values, set the CTC registers mounted on the effect control board 9012, and the like. I do. After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90122 is turned on. The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time elapses, for example, based on the CTC register setting or the like in the timer interrupt process executed separately from the effect control main process. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, it waits. Therefore, the command analysis process and the effect control process process, which will be described later, are executed every time a timer interrupt occurs.

Further, on the effect control board 9012 side, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but interrupts when using a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order. The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 90125, a control signal that becomes an effect control command is transmitted from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. To capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 90122. After that, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

When the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer is read and analyzed, and the settings and controls corresponding to the analysis results are set and controlled. Do.

After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process process is executed. In the effect control process process, the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 9011. Following the effect control process process, the effect random number update process is executed. In the effect random number update process, the software updates numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 90122 as various random number values used for the effect control. After that, the determination of whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on is executed again.

Next, the command analysis process will be described. In the command analysis process, the received command stored in the effect control command reception buffer is analyzed, which effect control command the received command is, and processing is performed according to the specified effect control command. When a plurality of reception commands are stored in the effect control command reception buffer, analysis or the like is performed for each reception command.

FIG. 34 shows the relationship between the effect control command specified by the analysis and the processing content corresponding to the effect control command. Each command reception flag and each command storage area in FIG. 34 are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122. In addition, setting each command reception flag means turning the flag on. The state of each command reception flag and the commands stored in each command storage area may be reset or deleted at appropriate timings. The first start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer are also provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122.

As shown in FIG. 35 (A), a hold display number serving as a buffer number is set in the command buffer at the time of winning the first start. A set of commands including the first start winning prize designation command, the first special figure hold storage number addition designation command, and the winning judgment result designation command is a storage area corresponding to the first hold display numbers "1" to "4". It is stored in order from the beginning of the free space in.

As shown in FIG. 35 (B), a hold display number serving as a buffer number is set in the command buffer at the time of winning the second start. A set of commands consisting of the second start winning prize designation command, the second special figure hold storage number addition designation command, and the winning judgment result designation command is a storage area corresponding to the second hold display numbers "1" to "4". It is stored in order from the beginning of the free space in.

The winning judgment result designation command is stored in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning when the first start winning designation command reception flag is on, and the second start when the second start winning designation command reception flag is on. It is stored in the command buffer at the time of winning. In one start winning, the start winning designation command is transmitted before the winning judgment result designation command, so it depends on the state of the first start winning designation command reception flag and the second start winning designation command reception flag. By specifying the storage destination of the start prize designation command, each command of the first start prize command transmitted from the main board 9011 when the first start prize occurs is stored in the first start prize command buffer as one set. Then, each command of the start winning command transmitted from the main board 9011 when the second start winning is generated is stored in the second starting winning command buffer as one set.

Further, each of the command reception flags for specifying the winning determination results in FIGS. 1-1 to 1-4 are provided corresponding to the hold display numbers "1" to "4" of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning. When the winning judgment result specification command is stored in the first start winning command buffer, the winning judgment result stored this time among the first 1-1 to 1-4 winning judgment result specification command reception flags is stored. The flag corresponding to the hold display number of the specified command is turned on. For example, when the winning judgment result specification command is stored corresponding to the hold display number "1", the 1-1 winning judgment result specification command reception flag is turned on, and the holding display number "2" is corresponded to. When the winning judgment result specification command is stored, the 1-2 winning judgment result specification command reception flag is turned on, and when the winning judgment result specification command is stored corresponding to the hold display number "3", the first 1-3 When the winning judgment result specification command reception flag is turned on and the winning judgment result specification command is stored corresponding to the hold display number "4", the 1-4th winning judgment result specification command reception flag is set. Turn on.

Each of the 2nd to 2nd to 4th winning judgment result designation command reception flags in FIG. 34 is provided corresponding to each of the hold display numbers "1" to "4" of the second start winning command buffer. , When the winning judgment result specification command is stored in the second start winning command buffer, the winning judgment result specification command stored this time among the 2-1 to 2-4 winning judgment result specification command reception flags The flag corresponding to the hold display number of is turned on. For example, when the winning judgment result specification command is stored corresponding to the hold display number "1", the 2-1 winning judgment result specification command reception flag is turned on and the hold display number "2" is corresponded to. When the winning judgment result specification command is stored, the 2nd 2nd winning judgment result specification command reception flag is turned on, and when the winning judgment result specification command is stored corresponding to the hold display number "3", the second 2-3 When the winning judgment result specification command reception flag is turned on and the winning judgment result specification command is stored corresponding to the hold display number "4", the 2-4 winning judgment result specification command reception flag is set. Turn on.

The first 1-1 to 1-4 winning judgment result designation commands and the 2-1 to 2-4 winning judgment result designation commands are collectively referred to as winning judgment result designation commands.

Since the winning judgment result specification command is transmitted last in one starting winning command, whether or not a new starting winning command has been received depending on the state of each of the above winning judgment result specification command reception flags. In addition, it is possible to specify which of the hold display numbers of the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer the newly received start winning command is stored.

Since the command at the time of the first start winning is transmitted from the main board 9011 in response to the occurrence of the hold of the first special figure game, when the hold of the first special figure game occurs, it is sent to the command buffer at the time of the first start prize. One set of received commands to be stored will be increased by one. Since the command at the time of the second start winning is transmitted from the main board 9011 in response to the occurrence of the hold of the second special figure game, at the time of the second start winning in response to the occurrence of the hold of the second special figure game. One set of received commands stored in the command buffer will be increased by one.

Further, as will be described in detail later, when the first special figure game is executed, the commands at the time of the first start winning, which are stored corresponding to the first hold display numbers "2" to "4", are the higher numbers. 1 The hold display number is shifted from "1" to "3". Further, when the second special figure game is executed, the second start winning command stored corresponding to the second hold display numbers "2" to "4" is the second hold display number "1" which is a higher number. Is shifted to "3".

With the above configuration, the hold display number of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning and the hold number of the hold storage unit of the first special figure are stored corresponding to the same number, and the command at the time of the first start win and the hold data are stored. The number of commands at the time of the first start winning, which is stored in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, is the same as the number of the first special figure hold storage number of the first special figure game. In addition, the hold display number of the second start winning command buffer and the hold number of the second special figure hold storage unit are stored corresponding to the same number, and the second start prize command and the hold data correspond to each other. Therefore, the number of the second start winning commands stored in the second start winning command buffer is the same as the number of the second special figure reserved memory of the second special figure game.

It should be noted that each hold display number in the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer also corresponds to each display position of the hold display image. Specifically, each hold display number of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning corresponds to each display position of the first hold display image provided in the area 905HA of the display area 905H, and the hold display number "1" is The leftmost display position in the area 905HA, the hold display number "2" corresponds to the second display position from the left in the area 905HA, and the hold display number "3" corresponds to the third display position from the left in the area 905HA. Corresponds to, and the hold display number "4" corresponds to the fourth display position from the left in the area 905HA. Further, each hold display number of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning corresponds to each display position of the second hold display image provided in the area 905HB of the display area 905H, and the hold display number "1" is in the area 905HB. Corresponding to the leftmost display position, the hold display number "2" corresponds to the second display position from the left in the area 905HB, and the hold display number "3" corresponds to the third display position from the left in the area 905HB. , The hold display number "4" corresponds to the fourth display position from the left in the area 905HB.

Further, the hold change effect execution pattern and the action effect execution pattern are stored in each of the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer. The hold change effect execution pattern will be described in detail later, but it specifies the execution pattern of the hold change effect, and is stored corresponding to the start winning command corresponding to the special figure game of the target of the hold change effect. .. Similarly, the action effect execution pattern specifies the execution pattern of the action effect, and is stored corresponding to the start winning command corresponding to the special figure game of the target of the action effect.

In the start winning command buffer of FIG. 35, "0000 (H)" indicates that the command is not stored, and "-" stores both the pending change effect execution pattern and the action effect execution pattern. Indicates that it has not been done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34, in the command analysis process, when the background designation command is received, the state of the high accuracy flag and the state of the high base flag are switched according to the background designated by the background designation command.

Next, the effect control process processing will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 36, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes the hold change effect setting process (step S90161), and then, according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90122, the following Any of the processes of steps S90170 to S90175 as described above is selected and executed.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the pending change effect setting process. In the hold change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received this time (step S90671). For example, if any of the 1st to 1st to 1st to 4th winning judgment result designation command reception flags and the 2nd to 2nd to 2nd to 2nd winning judgment result designation command reception flags are turned on, the start is started. Since the winning command is newly stored in the first starting winning command buffer or the second starting winning command buffer, it is determined that a new starting winning command has been received. When a plurality of flags among the above-mentioned winning judgment result specification command reception flags are turned on, the second start winning command having the largest hold display number is used as the "newly received start winning command". The following processing is executed for each command as the "newly received start winning command" of the start winning command of the hold display number corresponding to each of the plurality of turned-on flags. You may do so. Of the first start winning command and the second start winning command stored in the first start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer, which start winning command is "newly received start winning command". Can be specified by which of the winning judgment result specification command reception flags that are in the ON state. For example, if the 1-3 winning judgment result specification command reception flag is on, the first starting winning command stored in the hold display number "3" of the first starting winning command buffer is "newly received". If the 2-2 winning judgment result specification command reception flag is on, the second starting winning command is stored in the hold display number "2" of the second starting winning command buffer. The command becomes "newly received start winning command".

When there is no reception of a new start winning command (step S90671; NO) because both the first winning judgment result designation command reception flag and the second winning judgment result designation command reception flag are off. Since the hold change effect is not executed, the hold change effect setting process is terminated.

When a new start winning command is received (step S90671; YES), it is determined whether the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "1" (step S90672), and the new start winning command is received. If the hold display number corresponding to the start winning command received in is not "1" (step S90672; NO), the winning judgment result specification command included in the newly received start winning command is "No judgment". Is specified as the determination result (step S90673).

When the winning judgment result specification command does not specify "no judgment" as the judgment result (step S90673; NO), the hold change effect execution pattern is set in the first start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the action effect execution pattern is stored (step S90674), and if neither the hold change effect execution pattern nor the action effect execution pattern is stored (step S90674: NO), the hold change effect is performed. Whether or not to execute the command is determined (step S90675). In step S90675, for example, whether or not to execute the hold change effect is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. 38.

In step S90675, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR1'for determining whether or not to execute the hold change effect updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR1', it is determined whether or not to execute the hold change effect by referring to the hold change effect execution decision table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121. In the hold change effect execution decision table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR1'is "executed" or "executed", which is the decision result in a range different depending on the winning judgment result specified by the winning judgment result specification command. It suffices if it is assigned to the decision result of "no execution". In the hold change effect execution decision table, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the hold change effect if the decision result assigned according to the winning determination result to the decision value that matches the random number value SR1'extracted this time is "executed". Is determined to be executed, and if "not executed", it is determined not to execute the hold change effect.

As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 38, when the winning determination result is "big hit", the hold change effect is more likely to be executed than when the winning determination result is "missing". On the other hand, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "missing", the opposite is true. Therefore, when the hold change effect is executed, the jackpot expectation of the variable display of the target is higher than when it is not executed.

After that, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the action effect is executed (step S90676). Here, the action effect is an effect of whether or not a predetermined image acts on the hold display image. The action effect includes an action success effect in which the predetermined image acts on the hold display image and an action failure effect in which the predetermined image does not act on the hold display image.

In this embodiment, as an action effect, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated to act on the hold display image with the image of the arrow shot by the predetermined character displayed on the sub-image display device 9051. Perform the production of whether or not. In this embodiment, an arrow shot by a predetermined character displayed on the sub-image display device 9051 hits the hold display image, and a successful action effect and a predetermined character displayed on the sub-image display device 9051 are shot. It is possible to perform an action failure effect in which the arrow does not hit the hold display image. Then, when the action success effect is executed, the hold change effect is executed to change the mode of the hold display image, and when the action failure effect is executed, the hold change effect is not executed and the hold display image is displayed. Does not change.

In step S90676, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the action effect is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 39.

In step S90676, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR2'for determining whether or not to execute the action effect updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR2', the presence or absence of execution of the action effect is determined with reference to the action effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121. In the action effect execution determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR2'is [2] or [3] or [4] as the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command. It may be assigned to the decision result of "execution" or "no execution", which is the determination result, within a range different depending on whether or not the pending change effect is executed. In the effect control execution decision table, the effect control CPU 90120 has a decision value that matches the random number value SR2'extracted this time, and whether the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [2] or [3]. ] Or [4], and if the decision result assigned according to whether or not the pending change effect is executed is "execution", it is determined that the action effect is executed, and if "no execution", the action effect is performed. Decide not to run.

As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 39, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [2], the action effect is not executed. In addition, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [3] or [4], the hold change effect is "executed", and the hold change effect is "not executed". It is easier to execute the action effect. On the other hand, when the pending change effect is "no execution", the opposite is true. Therefore, when the action effect is executed, the expectation that the hold change effect is executed is higher than when the action effect is not executed.

After that, the effect control CPU 90120 determines in step S90675 whether or not it is determined to execute the hold change effect (step S90677), and if there is execution (step S90677; YES), the hold change effect is executed. The hold change effect execution pattern is determined (step S90678). When it is determined in step S90676 that the action effect is not executed, in step S90678, for example, the hold change effect execution pattern is determined at the determination rate as shown in FIG. 40. Specifically, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "2", the hold change effect pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 40 (A). Further, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "3", the hold change effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 40 (B). Further, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "4", the hold change effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 40 (C).

As described above, the hold change effect execution pattern is stored in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning or the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, and the special figure game before the target is executed together with the corresponding start winning command. When, it is shifted to the upper position of the hold display number. The hold change effect execution pattern without the action effect specifies the hold display number when the hold change effect is executed and the mode of change of the hold display image at that time, and the hold change effect execution pattern HP1' -1 to HP1'-2, HP2'-1 to HP2'-2, and HP3'-1 to HP3'-2 are available.

For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP1'-1 executes the hold change effect in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern shifts to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [1]. This is a hold change effect execution pattern that changes the display color of the hold display image of the target from white to green.

For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP2'-2 executes the hold change effect in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern shifts to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [2]. In the variable display executed when the display color of the hold display image of the target is changed from white to green and the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [1], the hold change effect is again produced. Is a hold change effect execution pattern that changes the display color of the hold display image of the target from green to red.

For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP3'-1 executes the hold change effect in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern shifts to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [3]. In the variable display executed when the display color of the hold display image of the target is changed from white to green and the hold change effect execution pattern is shifted to the storage area corresponding to the hold display numbers [2] and [1]. , This is a hold change effect execution pattern in which the display color of the hold display image of the target remains green without executing the hold change effect again.

When it is determined in step S90676 to execute the action effect, in step S90678, for example, the hold change effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 41. Specifically, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "3", the hold change effect pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 41 (A). Further, when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "4", the hold change effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 41 (B).

The hold change effect execution pattern accompanied by the action effect is the hold display number when the hold change effect is executed, the mode of changing the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 at that time, and the mode of the change of the hold display image at that time. Is specified, and the pending change effect execution patterns HP4'-1 to HP4'-2, HP5'-1 to HP5'-2, HP6'-1 to HP6'-2, HP7'-1 to HP7' -2 is prepared.

For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP4'-1 is the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern shifts to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [2]. After executing the action failure effect by rotating from vertical to diagonally, the display color of the hold display image of the target remains white without executing the hold change effect, and the hold change effect execution pattern is the hold display number [ In the variable display executed when shifting to the storage area corresponding to 1], the direction of the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated diagonally to the side to execute the action success effect, and then the hold change effect is executed. This is a hold change effect execution pattern that changes the display color of the hold display image of the target from white to green.

For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP5'-2 is the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern shifts to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [2]. After executing the action success effect by rotating from vertical to horizontal, the hold change effect is executed to change the display color of the target hold display image from white to green, and the hold change effect execution pattern is the hold display number. In the variable display executed when the image is shifted to the storage area corresponding to [1], the operation success effect is executed with the direction of the sub-image display device 9051 kept horizontal, and then the hold change effect is executed again to display the target. This is a hold change effect execution pattern that changes the display color of the hold display image from green to red.

For example, the hold change effect execution pattern HP7'-1 is the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 in the variable display executed when the hold change effect execution pattern shifts to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [3]. After executing the action success effect by rotating from vertical to horizontal, the hold change effect is executed to change the display color of the target hold display image from white to green, and the hold change effect execution pattern is the hold display number. In the variable display executed when shifting to the storage area corresponding to [2], the action failure effect is executed with the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 changed from vertical to horizontal, and then the hold change effect is not executed again. In the variable display executed when the display color of the hold display image of the target remains green and the hold change effect execution pattern shifts to the storage area corresponding to the hold display number [1], the sub-image display device 9051 This is a hold change effect execution pattern in which the display color of the hold display image of the target remains green without executing the hold change effect again after executing the action failure effect with the direction of is left horizontal.

In step S90678, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR3'for determining the pending change effect execution pattern updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR3', the pending change is referred to by any of the first reserved change effect execution pattern determination table to the fifth reserved change effect execution pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121. Determine the production execution pattern.

The first hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [2] when it is determined in step S90676 that the action effect is not executed. .. In the first pending change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR3'is the pending change that becomes the determination result within a range different depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specification command. It may be assigned to the effect execution pattern HP1'-1 or HP1'-2.

The second hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [3] when it is determined in step S90676 that the action effect is not executed. .. In the second pending change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR3'is the pending change that becomes the determination result within a range different depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specification command. It may be assigned to the effect execution patterns HP1'-1, HP1'-2, HP2'-1, and HP2'-2.

The third hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [4] when it is determined in step S90676 that the action effect is not executed. .. In the third pending change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR3'is the pending change that becomes the determination result within a range different depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specification command. It may be assigned to the effect execution patterns HP1'-1, HP1'-2, HP3'-1, and HP3'-2.

The fourth hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [3] when it is determined in step S90676 to execute the action effect. In the fourth pending change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR3'is the pending change that becomes the determination result within a range different depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specification command. It may be assigned to the effect execution patterns HP4'-1, HP4'-2, HP5'-1, and HP5'-2.

The fifth hold change effect execution pattern determination table is referred to when the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [4] when it is determined in step S90676 to execute the action effect. In the fifth pending change effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR3'is the pending change that becomes the determination result within a range different depending on the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specification command. It may be assigned to the effect execution patterns HP6'-1, HP6'-2, HP7'-1, and HP7'-2.

In each hold change effect execution pattern determination table, the effect control CPU 90120 assigns one of the hold change effect execution patterns assigned to the decision value matching the random number value SR3'extracted this time according to the winning determination result. Determined as the effect execution pattern of the pending change effect.

As can be seen from the determination ratios in FIGS. 40 and 41, when the winning judgment result is "big hit", the display color of the hold display image finally becomes "red", and the hold change effect execution pattern becomes "green". It is easier to select than the hold change effect execution pattern, and when the winning judgment result is "missing", the display color of the hold display image finally becomes "green". The hold change effect execution pattern becomes "red". It is easier to select than the pending change effect execution pattern. For this reason, when the hold change effect is executed, the jackpot expectation of the target special figure game is higher when the final display color of the hold display image is "red" than when it is "green". Is expensive. For this reason, the hold change effect that sets the final display color of the hold display image to "red" foretells that the jackpot expectation is the highest, and sets the final display color of the hold display image to "green". The change effect is lower than "red", but it is foretold that the jackpot expectation is higher than when the hold change effect is not executed.

Further, as can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 41 (A), when the winning determination result is "big hit" and the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the sub-image display device 9051 is in landscape orientation. The hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of "2 times" is easier to select than the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of "1 time", and the judgment result at the time of winning is "missing". When the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display in which the sub-image display device 9051 is in landscape orientation is "once" is "twice". It is easier to select than the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of. Therefore, when the hold change effect accompanied by the action effect is executed, if the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the period corresponding to the variable display of "once" by the sub-image display device 9051. The big hit expectation of the target special figure game is higher when the target is turned sideways for a period corresponding to the variable display of "twice" than when it is turned sideways over.

Further, as can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 41 (B), when the winning determination result is "big hit", when the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the sub-image display device 9051 is in landscape orientation. The hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of "3 times" is easier to select than the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of "2 times", and the judgment result at the time of winning is "missing". When the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display in which the sub-image display device 9051 is in landscape orientation is "2 times" is "3 times". It is easier to select than the hold change effect execution pattern corresponding to the variable display of. Therefore, when the hold change effect accompanied by the action effect is executed, if the final display color of the hold display image is the same color, the period corresponding to the variable display of "twice" by the sub-image display device 9051. The big hit expectation of the target special figure game is higher when the target is turned sideways for a period corresponding to the variable display of "3 times" than when it is turned sideways over.

For this reason, the sub-image display device 9051 foretells that the expectation of a big hit is the highest in the hold change effect accompanied by the action effect in which the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways for a period corresponding to the variable display of "3 times". It is foretold that the pending change effect with the action effect that turns sideways over the period corresponding to the variable display of "2 times" is lower than the case of "3 times", but the expectation of big hit is higher than that of "1 time". However, the hold change effect accompanied by the action effect in which the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways over the period corresponding to the variable display of "1 time" is lower than that in the case of "2 times", but the hold change effect accompanied by the action effect is Foretell that the jackpot expectation is higher than when it is not executed.

When there is no execution of the hold change effect (step S90677; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether it is determined to execute the action effect in step S90676 (step S90679), and when there is execution (step S90679; YES), the action effect execution pattern, which is the pattern for executing the action effect, is determined (step S90680). In step S90680, for example, the action effect execution pattern is determined at a determination rate similar to the determination rate of the hold change effect execution pattern shown in FIG. For example, the pattern that defines only the change in the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 in the hold change effect execution pattern shown in FIG. 41 may be set as the action effect execution pattern.

After step S90678 or S90680, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the determined hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern in association with the newly received start winning command (step S90681). As a result, it can be seen that the special figure game corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern is the target, and the execution timing of the hold change effect or the action effect depends on the hold change effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern. I understand.

After step S90681, if the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is [1] (step S90672; YES), the winning judgment result specification command specifies "no judgment" as the judgment result. (Step S90673; YES), when the hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern is stored (step S90674; YES), or when neither the hold change effect nor the action effect is executed (step S90679; NO). ), A process of updating the display of the hold display image in response to the reception of a new start winning command is performed (step S90682).

In step S90682, for example, by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123, it corresponds to the hold display number corresponding to the on-winning determination result designation command reception flag. , Performs a process of starting the display of the hold display image at the display position of the display area 905H. As a result, the hold display image corresponding to the newly received start winning command is newly displayed. The hold display image is displayed as a hold display image corresponding to the newly held special figure game until the newly held special figure game is executed.

The first hold display image displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold display number [1] of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning is at the time of the first start winning stored corresponding to the hold display number [1]. In addition to corresponding to commands, it also corresponds to the hold data corresponding to the hold number [1] of the first special figure hold storage unit, the first special figure game executed by the hold data, and the like. This also applies to each first hold display image displayed at each display position corresponding to the hold display numbers [2] to [4] of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning.

The second hold display image displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold display number [1] of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning is the second start winning time stored corresponding to the hold display number [1]. In addition to corresponding to commands, it also corresponds to the hold data corresponding to the hold number [1] of the second special figure hold storage unit, the second special figure game executed by the hold data, and the like. This also applies to each second hold display image displayed at each display position corresponding to the hold display numbers [2] to [4] of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning.

After step S90682, the hold change effect setting process ends. At this time, it is preferable to reset the state of the command reception flag for specifying the determination result at the time of winning.

The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In this variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not a variable start designation command from the main board 9011 has been received. The determination may be made based on whether or not the fluctuation start designation command reception flag controlled by the command analysis process is turned on. When the variable start designation command is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the start of the special figure game, so the value of the effect process flag is set to "1" corresponding to the variable display start setting process. After updating to, the variable display start waiting process ends. If the variable start specification command has not been received, the variable display start wait process ends as it is.

The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines the final stop symbol according to the variable display variation pattern and the variable display result this time (step S90321). The variation pattern may be specified based on the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 9011 and stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. The variable display result may be specified based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 and stored in the display result designation command storage area.

For example, when the variable display result is "missing" and the variable pattern is a non-reach variable pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, a non-reach combination is configured. The combination of the final stop symbols is determined as the combination of the final decorative symbols. When the variable display result is "loss" and the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern that specifies "reach", the combination of the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination is determined as the combination of the final decorative symbols. When the variable display result is "big hit", the combination of the final stop symbols constituting the big hit combination is determined as the combination of the final decorative symbols. Each combination of fixed decorative symbols is prepared in advance using a random number value updated by an effect random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 90124 or RAM 90122, and a determination table stored in advance in ROM 90121. It is advisable to randomly determine from the combination of fixed decorative patterns. The same decorative pattern constituting the jackpot combination may be different depending on the jackpot type.

After step S90321, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control pattern setting process (step S90322). FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control pattern setting process. In the effect control pattern setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 first shifts the stored contents of the first start winning command buffer or the second start winning command buffer (step S90901). Specifically, when the first variable start designation command is received, the first start prize is stored corresponding to the first hold display numbers [2] to [4] of the command buffer at the time of the first start prize. The hour command, the hold change effect execution pattern, or the action effect execution pattern is shifted to the first hold display numbers [1] to [3] of higher numbers, respectively. When the second variable start designation command is received, the second start winning command and the pending change are stored corresponding to the second hold display numbers [2] to [4] of the second start winning command buffer. The effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern is shifted to the second hold display numbers [1] to [3], which are higher numbers, respectively.

Next, the hold change effect execution pattern stored in the first start winning command buffer or the second start winning command buffer of the person whose stored contents are shifted is checked (step S90902), and the hold change effect execution pattern or When the action effect execution pattern is stored, the hold display number specified by the hold change effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern, and the actual hold display number corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern or the action effect execution pattern. Is the same, and it is confirmed whether or not it is necessary to execute the hold change effect or the action effect (step S90903).

The hold display number specified by the hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern is the same as the actual hold display number corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern, and the hold display effect or action effect is executed. In the case of (step S90903; YES), the effect control pattern for executing the hold change effect that changes the hold display image in the mode of changing the hold display image at the current hold display number specified by the hold change effect execution pattern. , The hold change that changes the hold display image in the change mode of the hold display image after executing the action effect in the displacement mode of the sub-image display device 9051 at the current hold display number specified in the hold change effect execution pattern. The effect control pattern for executing the effect effect or the effect control pattern for executing the effect effect is set in the mode of displacement of the sub-image display device 9051 at the current hold display number, which is set in the effect effect control pattern for executing the effect (step S90904). For example, when the hold change effect execution pattern is HP3'-2 and the hold display number corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern after shift is [3], the hold change effect that changes the hold display image from white to green is performed. Set up an effect control pattern to be executed. When the hold change effect execution pattern is HP3'-2 and the hold display number corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern after shift is [1], the hold change effect that changes the hold display image from green to red is executed. Set the effect control pattern.

In this embodiment, a plurality of hold change effect execution patterns or action effect execution patterns are not stored, but as another embodiment, a plurality of hold change effect execution patterns or action effect execution patterns are stored. For each hold change effect execution pattern and action effect execution pattern When executing the hold change effect and action effect, a plurality of hold change effect and effect control patterns for executing the action effect are set as the patterns used this time. To do. At this time, a plurality of pending change effects and action effects may be executed at the same time or sequentially.

The hold display number specified by the hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern is different from the actual hold display number corresponding to the hold change effect execution pattern or action effect execution pattern, and the hold display effect or action effect is not executed. Case (step S90903; NO), or after step S90904, it is determined whether or not the call advance notice effect is executed, and the call advance notice effect execution pattern, which is a pattern for executing the call advance notice effect when executing the call advance notice effect (step S90903; NO). Step S90905). The call advance notice effect is an effect in which a call screen for a predetermined character appears at the start of variable display of a decorative pattern. In step S90905, for example, whether or not the call advance notice effect is executed and the call advance notice effect execution pattern when the call advance notice effect is executed are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 44.

The call advance notice effect execution pattern specifies the mode of calling a predetermined character when executing the call advance notice effect, and the call advance notice effect execution patterns YP1'-1 and YP1'-2 are prepared.

For example, the call advance notice effect execution pattern YP1'-1 is a call advance notice effect execution pattern in which a call advance notice effect is executed and a predetermined character calls "I don't want to do it".

For example, the call advance notice effect execution pattern YP1'-2 is a call advance notice effect execution pattern in which the call advance notice effect is executed and a predetermined character calls "Hey".

In step S90905, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the call advance notice effect is executed, which is updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like, and the call advance notice effect execution pattern when the call advance notice effect is executed. The numerical data indicating the random number value SR4'of is extracted. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR4', the presence or absence of execution of the call advance notice effect and the call advance notice when the call advance notice effect is executed are referred to by referring to the call advance notice effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121. Determine the production execution pattern.

In the call advance notice effect execution decision table, for example, whether or not the call advance notice effect is executed, which is the determination result, in a range in which the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR4'depends on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. It suffices that it is assigned to the call notice effect execution patterns YP1'-1 and YP1'-2 when the call notice effect is executed.

In the call advance notice effect execution decision table, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the call advance notice effect is executed, which is assigned to the determined value matching the random number value SR4'extracted this time according to the winning determination result, and the call advance notice effect. When executing, any one of the call advance notice effect execution patterns is determined as the effect execution pattern of the call advance notice effect when executing the current call advance notice effect.

As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 44, when the fluctuation pattern is "reach", the call advance notice effect is more easily executed than when the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach". On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach", the opposite is true. Therefore, when the call advance notice effect is executed, the reach expectation that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined reach mode is higher than when it is not executed.

Further, as can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 44, when the fluctuation pattern is "reach", the call for the predetermined character becomes "hey", and the call notice effect execution pattern becomes "I don't want to do it". It is easier to select than the production execution pattern, and when the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach", the call for the predetermined character becomes "I don't want to do it". The call notice that the production execution pattern becomes "Hey". It is easier to select than the notice effect execution pattern. For this reason, when the call advance notice effect is executed, the reach expectation is higher when the call of the predetermined character becomes "Hey" than when it becomes "I don't want to do it". For this reason, the call notice effect that the call of the predetermined character becomes "Hey" is a notice that the reach expectation is the highest, and the call notice effect that the call of the predetermined character becomes "I don't want to do it" is. , It is lower than "Hey ~", but it is announced that the reach expectation is higher than when the call announcement production is not executed.

After step S90905, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display this time specifies reach (step S90906).

When the variation pattern of the variable display this time specifies the reach (step S90906; YES), it is determined whether to execute the count-up notice effect (step S90907). The count-up notice effect is an effect in which a predetermined character counts up. The effect control CPU 90120 determines, for example, whether or not to execute the count-up notice effect at the determination rate shown in FIG. 45.

In step S90907, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR5'for determining whether or not to execute the count-up notice effect updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR5', it is determined whether or not to execute the count-up notice effect by referring to the count-up notice effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121. In the count-up notice effect execution decision table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR5'depends depending on whether the current fluctuation pattern specifies the execution of super reach or the execution of only normal reach. Within the range, it may be assigned to "with execution" or "without execution" as the decision result. In the count-up notice effect execution decision table, the effect control CPU 90120 specifies that the current fluctuation pattern specifies the execution of super reach or the execution of only normal reach as the determined value that matches the random number value SR5'extracted this time. When the decision value assigned according to whether or not it is "executed", it is determined to execute the count-up notice effect, and when the assigned decision result is "not executed", the count-up notice effect is executed. Decide not to.

As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 45, when the super reach is executed, the execution ratio of the count-up notice effect is high, and when only the normal reach is executed, the execution ratio of the count-up notice effect is low. When the production is performed, there is a high possibility that it will develop from normal reach to super reach.

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether to execute the specific effect (step S90908). The specific effect is an effect of maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051, and it is possible to execute an effect in which the period of maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in portrait orientation and the period of maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in landscape orientation are different. Is. The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the specific effect is executed at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 46, for example.

In step S90908, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR6'for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect, which is updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR6', the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect is determined with reference to the specific effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121. In the specific effect execution determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR6'is in a range different depending on whether or not the call advance notice effect is executed and the effect execution pattern of the call advance notice effect when the call advance notice effect is executed. Then, it suffices if it is assigned to "with execution" or "without execution" which is the decision result. In the specific effect execution decision table, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the call advance notice effect is executed and the effect execution of the call advance notice effect when the call advance notice effect is executed, based on the determined value that matches the random number value SR6'extracted this time. When the determined value assigned according to the pattern is "executed", it is determined to execute the specific effect, and when the determined value assigned according to the pattern is "not executed", it is determined not to execute the specific effect.

As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 46, when the call advance notice effect is executed, the execution rate of the specific effect is high, and when the call advance notice effect is not executed, the execution rate of the specific effect is low, so that the call advance notice effect is executed. At that time, there is a high possibility that the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways.

Further, as can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 46, when the call for the predetermined character becomes "I don't want to do it" when the call advance notice effect is executed, the execution ratio of the specific effect is high and "Hey". When becomes, the execution rate of the specific effect is low, so when the call notice effect is executed and the call of the predetermined character is "I don't want to do it", the specific effect is executed and the sub image is displayed. There is a high possibility that the device 9051 will be turned sideways.

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the specific effect is determined to be executed in step S90907 (step S90909), and when the specific effect is executed (step S90909; YES), the pattern is such that the specific effect is executed. A specific effect execution pattern is determined (step S90910). In step S90910, for example, the specific effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 47.

The specific effect execution pattern specifies a period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 sideways when executing the specific effect, and specific effect execution patterns TP1'-1 to TP1'-3 are prepared.

For example, the specific effect execution pattern TP1'-1 is a specific effect execution pattern that executes a specific effect and maintains the sub-image display device 9051 sideways for "1000 ms".

For example, the specific effect execution pattern TP1'-2 is a specific effect execution pattern that executes the specific effect and maintains the sub-image display device 9051 sideways for "10000 ms".

For example, the specific effect execution pattern TP1'-1 is a specific effect execution pattern that executes the specific effect and maintains the sub-image display device 9051 sideways for "15000 ms".

In step S90910, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR7'for determining a specific effect execution pattern updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR7', the specific effect execution pattern is determined with reference to the specific effect execution pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121.

In the specific effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR7'is a determination result in a range different depending on the variable display result specified by the display result specification command. It may be assigned to ~ TP1'-3.

In the specific effect execution pattern determination table, the effect control CPU 90120 assigns one of the specific effect execution patterns assigned to the determined value matching the random number value SR7'extracted this time according to the variable display result to the effect of the specific effect this time. Determined as an execution pattern.

As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 47, when the variable display result is "big hit", the specific effect execution pattern that keeps the sub-image display device 9051 sideways for a long time keeps the sub-image display device 9051 sideways. Is easier to select than the short specific effect execution pattern, and when the variable display result is "missing", the specific effect execution pattern that keeps the sub-image display device 9051 sideways for a short time is the sub-image display device 9051. It is easier to select than a specific effect execution pattern that takes a long time to be maintained sideways. Therefore, the longer the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways when the specific effect is executed, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, the specific effect of maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 sideways at "15000 ms" foretells that the jackpot expectation is the highest, and the specific effect of maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 sideways at "10000 ms" is "15000 ms". The specific effect of maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 sideways at "1000 ms" is lower than maintaining "10000 ms", foretelling that the expectation of a big hit is higher than maintaining "1000 ms", although it is lower than maintaining it. Foretell that the jackpot expectation is higher than when the specific production is not executed.

After that, the effect control CPU 90120 determines in step S90910 whether the specific effect execution pattern TP1'-1 is determined as the effect execution pattern of the specific effect this time (step S90911), and if it is not the specific effect execution pattern TP1'-1. (Step S90911; NO), a pseudo-ream effect execution pattern, which is a pattern for executing the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", is determined (step S90912).

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the fact that the start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once. It is possible to perform the effect display to be changed again up to a predetermined time after the temporary stop is performed by. The number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is the display of "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols, excluding the initial variation from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the first temporary stop of all decorative symbols. The number of times the decorative symbol revariates in all of the areas 905L, 905C, and 905R may be sufficient.

In the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", as an example, in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right", a plurality of predetermined pseudo-ream chances of a special combination are used. A decorative pattern that is one of the types of loss combinations is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", a predetermined effect such as an image display, which is a re-variation effect, may be executed along with a plurality of variable displays including the initial variation. The re-variation effect is not limited to the one by displaying an image on the screen of the image display device 905 or the sub-image display device 9051, and may include an arbitrary effect operation using various effect devices. Good.

As an example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, the LED is lit among a plurality of decorative LEDs provided inside or outside the game area during each variation display by the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream". It may be controlled so that the things increase one by one. Further, during each variable display period, the display color of the decorative LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting of the plurality of decorative LEDs may be controlled to change. ..

As a further example of the re-variation effect different from the image display, the effect model provided inside or outside the game area is controlled to operate during the period of the variation display by the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream". You may. At this time, during each variation display period, the operation mode of the effect model may be controlled to change, or the operating model among the plurality of effect models may be controlled to change. ..

During the period of each variable display by the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", it may be controlled to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image on the screen of the image display device 905. Further, as a re-variation effect, for example, when a decorative symbol that is a pseudo-continuous chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed, a sound effect that is a special sound effect may be controlled to be output from the speakers 908L and 908R. In addition to some or all of these re-variable effects, or in place of some or all of these re-variable effects, lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, operation of production models, display of production images, sound effects Of the output of, it may be controlled to execute a re-variation effect in which a part or all of the output is combined. At this time, when the re-variation effect is executed by combining a plurality of types of effect modes, or when the re-variation effect is executed a plurality of times, as compared with the case where the re-variation effect is executed by only one type of effect mode. When the effect mode is changed, the possibility that a predetermined game value such as the jackpot expectation is given and the possibility that the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player may be increased.

In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-ream fluctuation once to three times, and the decorative symbol is used. It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of is started 2 to 4 times in a row. Then, when the number of pseudo-reams is large, the expectation of big hits is higher than when the number of pseudo-reams is small. Further, it may be controlled so that the generation rate of the effect changes depending on the number of pseudo-reams. For example, the pseudo-continuous variation may be performed twice to be "reach confirmed", and the pseudo-continuous variation may be performed three times to be "super reach confirmed". It should be noted that the number of pseudo-reams in the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" may be executed up to a number of times more than 1 to 3 times, for example, 4 times or 5 times.

In step S90912, for example, the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 48.

The pseudo-ream effect execution pattern specifies the number of pseudo-reams when executing the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" and the dialogue of a predetermined character when the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is terminated. , Pseudo-continuous production execution patterns GP1'-1 to GP1'-3 are prepared.

For example, the pseudo-ream effect execution pattern GP1'-1 is a predetermined character when the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" having one pseudo-ream count is executed and the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is terminated. This is a pseudo-continuous production execution pattern in which the dialogue becomes "Peace!".

For example, in the pseudo-ream effect execution pattern GP1'-2, the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" having two pseudo-reams is executed, and the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is terminated. This is a pseudo-continuous production execution pattern in which the dialogue becomes a "chance!"

For example, the pseudo-ream effect execution pattern GP1'-3 is a predetermined character when the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" having three pseudo-reams is executed and the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is terminated. This is a pseudo-continuous production execution pattern in which the dialogue becomes "Amazing!".

In step S90912, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR8'for determining a pseudo-continuous effect execution pattern updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR8', the pseudo-continuous production execution pattern is determined with reference to the pseudo-continuous production execution pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121.

In the pseudo-continuous effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR8' differs depending on whether the specific effect execution pattern TP1'-2 or the specific effect execution pattern TP1'-3 is determined. Within the range, it may be assigned to the pseudo-continuous production execution patterns GP1'-1 to GP1'-3 that are the determination results.

In the pseudo-continuous production execution pattern determination table, the effect control CPU 90120 assigns any one of the pseudo-continuous production execution patterns assigned to the determination values matching the random number value SR8'extracted this time according to the specific effect execution pattern to the present "pseudo-continuous production execution pattern". It is determined as an effect execution pattern of the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream".

As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 48, in the case of the specific effect execution pattern "TP1'-3" having the highest expectation of big hit, it is easy to select the pseudo-ream effect execution pattern having a large number of pseudo-reams, and the specific effect execution. In the case of the specific effect execution pattern "TP1'-2", which has a lower expectation of a big hit than the pattern "TP1'-3", it is easy to select a pseudo-ream effect execution pattern with a small number of pseudo-reams. Therefore, when the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is executed, the larger the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the expectation of a big hit. For this reason, the revariable effect of "3 times" is executed, and the variable display effect of "pseudo-ren" in which the dialogue of the predetermined character at the end of the effect is "amazing!" Is foretold that the jackpot expectation is the highest. Then, the re-variation effect of "2 times" is executed, and the variable display effect of "pseudo-ren" in which the dialogue of the predetermined character at the end of the effect is "chance!" Is executed by the re-variation effect of "3 times". It is lower than when it is done, but it is foretold that the expectation of big hit is higher than when the "1 time" revariation effect is executed, and the "1 time" revariation effect is executed, and the predetermined at the end of the effect The variable display effect of "pseudo-ren" in which the character's dialogue is "piece!" Is lower than when the re-variation effect of "twice" is executed, but it is lower than when the variable display effect of "pseudo-ren" is not executed. Also foretells that the big hit expectation is high.

After that, the effect control CPU 90120 determines in step S90907 whether the count-up advance notice effect is determined to be executed (step S90913), and if there is execution (step S90913; YES), the specific effect is executed and the sub-image is executed. A count-up advance notice effect execution pattern, which is a pattern for executing the count-up advance notice effect when the display device 9051 is maintained sideways, is determined (step S90914). In step S90914, for example, the count-up notice effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 49 (A).

The count-up notice effect execution pattern specifies the number of counts by a predetermined character when the count-up notice effect is executed, and count-up notice effect execution patterns YP2'-1 to YP2'-3 are prepared.

For example, the count advance notice effect execution pattern YP2'-1 is a count advance notice effect execution pattern that executes the count advance notice effect and counts up to the count "3" by a predetermined character.

For example, the count advance notice effect execution pattern YP2'-2 is a count advance notice effect execution pattern that executes the count advance notice effect and counts up to the count "4" by a predetermined character.

For example, the count advance notice effect execution pattern YP2'-3 is a count advance notice effect execution pattern that executes the count advance notice effect and counts up to the count "5" by a predetermined character.

In step S90914, the effect control CPU 90120 first extracts numerical data indicating a random number value SR9'for determining the count-up notice effect execution pattern updated by the random number circuit 90124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR9', the count-up advance notice effect execution pattern is determined with reference to the count-up advance notice effect execution pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121.

In the count-up advance notice effect execution pattern determination table, for example, the count-up advance notice effect execution pattern that becomes the determination result in a range in which the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR9'dependes on the variable display result specified by the display result specification command It may be assigned to YP2'-1 to YP2'-3.

In the count-up notice effect execution pattern determination table, the effect control CPU 90120 assigns one of the count-up advance notice effect execution patterns assigned to the determined value matching the random number value SR9'extracted this time according to the variable display result. It is decided as the production execution pattern of the count-up notice production.

As can be seen from the determination ratio in FIG. 49 (A), when the variable display result is "big hit", it is easy to select a count-up notice effect execution pattern having a large number of counts by a predetermined character, and the variable display result is " In the case of "loss", it is easy to select a count-up notice effect execution pattern in which the number of counts by a predetermined character is small. Therefore, when the count-up notice effect is executed, the larger the number of counts by the predetermined character, the higher the expectation of big hit. For this reason, the count-up notice effect that counts up to the count "5" by the predetermined character announces that the jackpot expectation is the highest, and the count-up notice effect that counts up to the count "4" by the predetermined character is The count-up notice effect, which is lower than the count "5" but has a higher expectation of a big hit than the count "3" and counts up to the count "3" by a predetermined character, is lower than the count "4". Notice that the jackpot expectation is higher than when the count-up notice effect is not executed.

After step S90914, when the effect execution pattern of the specific effect this time is the specific effect execution pattern "TP1'-1" (step S90911; YES), or when the count-up notice effect is not executed (step S90913; NO). ), The variable display effect is executed according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the determined final stop symbol, and as a part of the variable display effect, the specific effect and the specific effect are executed, and the sub-image display device 9051 An effect control pattern capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the image has turned sideways is set as the pattern used this time (step S90915).

When the specific effect is not executed (step S90909; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether it is determined to execute the count-up notice effect in step S90907 (step S90916), and if it is executed (step S90916; YES), the count-up notice effect execution pattern, which is a pattern for executing the count-up notice effect when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the vertical direction without executing the specific effect, is determined (step S90917). In step S90917, for example, the same processing as that of step S90914 is performed, and the count-up notice effect execution pattern is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 49 (B).

As can be seen from the determination ratios of FIGS. 49A and 49B, when the count-up notice effect is executed when the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways, the specific effect is executed. When the variable display result is "big hit", the number of counts by the predetermined character is larger than when the count-up notice effect is executed when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in portrait orientation without executing. The up-notice effect execution pattern is easily selected, and when the variable display result is "missing", the count-up notice effect execution pattern with a small number of counts by a predetermined character is easily selected. Therefore, even if the count-up notice effect has the same number of counts by a predetermined character, the big hit expectation of the count-up notice effect executed when the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways. The degree is higher than the jackpot expectation degree of the count-up notice effect executed when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in the vertical direction without executing the specific effect.

After step S90917, or when the count-up notice effect is not executed (step S90916; NO), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display this time specifies super reach (step S90918).

When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display this time specifies super reach (step S90918; YES), whether or not the development time production is executed, and the development time production which is a pattern for executing the development time production when the development time production is executed. The execution pattern is determined (step S90919). The development time production is a production performed when developing from normal reach to super reach. In step S90919, for example, whether or not the development time effect is executed and the development time effect execution pattern when the development time effect is executed are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 50.

The development time effect execution pattern specifies the mode of the effect when the development time effect is executed, and the development time effect execution patterns HP1'-1 and HP1'-2 are prepared.

For example, the development-time effect execution pattern HP1'-1 is a development-time effect execution pattern in which the "first character" acts on the decorative symbol.

For example, the development-time effect execution pattern HP1'-1 is a development-time effect execution pattern in which the "second character" acts on the decorative symbol.

In step S90919, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the development time effect is executed, which is updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter, and the development time effect execution pattern when the development time effect is executed. The numerical data indicating the random number value SR10'for the purpose is extracted. Subsequently, based on the random number value SR10', the presence or absence of execution of the development time effect and the development time when the development time effect is executed with reference to the development time effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 and prepared. Determine the production execution pattern.

In the development time production execution decision table, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the development time production that is the determination result is determined in a range in which the numerical value to be compared with the random number value SR10'depends on the variable display result specified by the display result specification command. , It suffices that it is assigned to the development time effect execution patterns HP1'-1 and HP1'-2 when the development time effect is executed.

The effect control CPU 90120 executes the development time effect and whether or not the development time effect is executed, which is assigned to the determination value matching the random number value SR10'extracted this time according to the variable display result in the development time effect execution decision table. When this is done, one of the development-time production execution patterns is determined as the development-time production execution pattern when the current development-time production is executed.

As can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 50, when the variable display result is "big hit", it is easier to execute the development effect than when the variable display result is "miss". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "missing", the opposite is true. For this reason, when the development time production is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it is not executed.

Further, as can be seen from the determination ratio of FIG. 50, when the variable display result is "big hit", the development time effect execution pattern in which the "second character" acts on the decorative symbol and the "first character" act on the decorative symbol. It is easier to select than the development time production execution pattern, and when the variable display result is "missing", the development time production execution pattern in which the "first character" acts on the decorative pattern is decorated by the "second character". It is easier to select than the development effect execution pattern that acts on the pattern. For this reason, when the development effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher when the "second character" acts on the decorative symbol than when the "first character" acts on the decorative symbol. For this reason, the development-time production in which the "second character" acts on the decorative design foretells that the jackpot expectation is the highest, and the development-time production in which the "first character" acts on the decoration design is the "first character". Although it is lower than ", the expectation for big hits is higher than when the production at the time of development is not executed.

After step S90919, if the current variable display variation pattern does not specify reach (step S90906; NO), or if the current variable display variation pattern does not specify super reach (step S90908; NO), the variation pattern or An effect control pattern that executes the variable display effect according to the determined combination of the final stop symbols and does not execute the specific effect or the like is set as the pattern used this time (step S90920).

After steps S90915 and S90920, the effect control pattern setting process ends.

Returning to FIG. 42, after step S90322, the effect control CPU 90120 initially sets a timer value corresponding to the special figure variation time corresponding to the current variation pattern to the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90122. It is set as a value (step S90323).

Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative symbol or the like in the image display device 905 and the variation of the small symbol in the sub-image display device 9051 is made. At this time, for example, by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123 based on the display control data included in the effect control pattern set as the use pattern in step S90322, the image is displayed. The "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the display area of the display device 905 start to change the decorative symbol, and the display area of the sub-image display device 9051. The variation of the small symbol may be started in the small symbol display area 9051V provided in.

After that, the display update setting of the hold display image is performed (step S90325). For example, if the received fluctuation start designation command is the first fluctuation start designation command, the area to the left of the display area 905H is transmitted by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. The leftmost first hold display image of 905HA is erased, and each of the other first hold display images is shifted to the display position adjacent to the left. For example, if the received fluctuation start designation command is the second fluctuation start designation command, the area to the right of the display area 905H is transmitted by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. The leftmost second hold display image of 905HB is erased, and each of the other second hold display images is shifted to the display position adjacent to the left.

As described above, the start winning command is newly stored in the start winning command buffer in response to the newly stored hold data in the special figure hold storage unit when the special figure game is held. .. Then, at this time, the hold display symbol is added in step S90682. At the start of the special figure game, the stored contents of the start winning command are shifted in step S90901 in response to the deletion of one hold data from the special figure hold storage unit. Then, at this time, in step S90325, one hold display symbol is erased, and the display position of the other hold display symbol is shifted. In this way, the hold display number and the hold number correspond to each other, and when the numbers are the same, the start winning command and the hold data and the special figure game corresponding to the hold data correspond to each other, and further, the same number. The hold display symbol of the display position corresponding to the hold display number of is also supported.

After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the variable display process (step S90326), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, various control data are read from the effect control pattern determined in step S90171 in response to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and the decorative pattern is variable. It includes processing for performing various effect controls during display. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, the final stop symbol as the final stop symbol, which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is completely stopped and displayed in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011. The process to make it is included. It should be noted that the final decoration symbol may be completely stopped and displayed in response to the fact that the end code is read from the predetermined effect control pattern. In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command elapses, the effect control board 9012 autonomously operates without using the effect control command from the main board 9011. The variable display result can be confirmed by deriving and displaying the fixed decorative symbol. After performing such effect control and the like, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The special figure hit waiting process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the effect control pattern for executing the effect during the jackpot game state is set as the use pattern, and the value of the effect process flag is "4". Update to. At this time, the timer initial value corresponding to the execution time of the effect control pattern set as the use pattern is set in the effect control process timer, and this process is terminated.

If it is determined that the hit start designation command has not been received, it is determined whether the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed. For example, the elapse of the waiting time is determined by subtracting 1 from the value of the effect control process timer and determining whether the subtracted timer value is “0”. If the timer value after subtraction 1 is not "0", it means that the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command has not elapsed, so this process is terminated as it is. If the timer value after subtraction 1 is "0", it means that the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command has elapsed. Therefore, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "missing". The value of the effect process flag is updated to "0", and this process ends.

The hitting process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this hit processing, the effect control CPU 90120 decrements the timer value of the effect control process timer by 1, and is the same value as the timer value after decrementing 1 of the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the use pattern. The effect operation control is performed based on the effect control execution data associated with the process timer determination value. By repeatedly executing step S90174 for each timer interrupt, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the jackpot game state.

In the hit processing, it is further determined whether the hit end designation command has been received, and if the hit end designation command has not been received, since all the round games have not been completed, the value of the effect process flag is not updated. The process is terminated. Further, when the hit end designation command is received, it means that all the round games have been completed. Therefore, in order to start the execution of the ending effect, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to step S90175. Update to 5 ”and end the hit process. At the time of this update, the effect control pattern for iteming the ending is selected as the use pattern, and the timer initial value according to the execution time of the effect control pattern selected as the use pattern is set in the effect control process timer. The effect control pattern of the ending may be set in advance.

The ending process of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the ending period has elapsed. For example, it is determined whether or not the data included in the effect control pattern associated with the process timer determination value which is the same value as the timer value obtained by subtracting 1 from the timer value of the effect control process timer is the end code. By doing so, it is determined whether the ending period has passed.

If the data included in the effect control pattern is not the end code and the ending period has not elapsed, the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the pattern to be used will be the same as the timer value after subtraction by 1. Based on the effect control execution data associated with the process timer determination value, the effect operation control of the ending is performed, and this process is terminated. By repeatedly executing step S90175 for each timer interrupt, execution of the ending effect is realized. When the data included in the effect control pattern is the end code, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", this process ends. When the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", the effect control process timer and various data such as the state of various flags and the value of the counter are appropriately reset.

Next, an example of the effect screen realized in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 57. In FIGS. 51 to 57, the arrows displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R and the small symbol display area 9051V indicate that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed.

First, with reference to FIG. 51, an example of an effect screen of a call advance notice effect, a specific effect, a notification effect, and a variable display effect of "pseudo-ream" will be described.

For example, if the call advance notice effect execution pattern YP1'-1 is determined in step S90905 of FIG. 43, the character image CA (character CA) is displayed on the image display device 905 after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. A call announcement production that calls out "Takuna-i" is started (Fig. 51 (A)).

After that, for example, if the variation pattern of the variable display this time specifies the reach, the reach occurs in the variable display of the decorative symbol (FIG. 51 (B)).

After that, for example, if it is decided in step S90908 of FIG. 43 to execute the specific effect, the character image CB (character CB) and the cliff image G (cliff G) are displayed on the sub-image display device 9051, and the image is displayed. A specific effect in which the character image CC (three character CCs) is displayed on the display device 905 is started (FIG. 51 (C)).

After that, the sub-image display device 9051 rotates from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction (FIG. 51 (D)). At this time, the sub-image display device 9051 executes an effect in which the character CB jumps under the cliff G in accordance with the operation of the sub-image display device 9051 rotating from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction.

After that, in response to the sub-image display device 9051 turning sideways, the sub-image display device 9051 is notified that the sub-image display device 9051 has turned sideways by turning on the game effect lamp 909 provided on the sub-image display device 9051. The notification effect is executed (FIG. 51 (E)). Further, in response to the sub-image display device 9051 being turned sideways, an effect in which the character CB and the three character CCs fight is executed.

After that, for example, if the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern GP1'-1 is determined in step S90912 of FIG. 43, the variable display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (FIG. 51 (F)). At this time, the effect that the character CB defeats one of the three character CCs is executed.

After that, if the first (last) pseudo-continuous variation is started and, for example, the specific effect execution pattern TP1'-2 is determined in step S90910 of FIG. 43, the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways. The sub-image display device 9051 rotates from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction according to the elapse of "10000 ms" (FIG. 51 (G)). At this time, the sub-image display device 9051 executes an effect in which the character CB jumps onto the cliff G in accordance with the operation of the sub-image display device 9051 rotating from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. Further, in the image display device 905, the effect of escaping the remaining two character CCs while the one character CC defeated by the character CB is defeated is executed.

After that, the sub-image display device 9051 is oriented vertically, and in response to the end of the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", the effect that the character CB emits the line "Peace!" Is executed (FIG. 51 (H). )).

It is sufficient that the character CB defeats the character CC one by one each time the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is repeated. In that case, for example, if three character CCs are displayed, a maximum of three pseudo-ream fluctuations may be executed, and the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is performed according to the number of character CCs. The number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations may be suggested.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, an example of an effect screen for a specific effect and a notification effect will be described.

For example, if it is determined in step S90908 of FIG. 43 to execute the specific effect, the character image CB (character CB) and the cliff image G (cliff G) are displayed on the sub-image display device 9051, and the image display device 905 A specific effect in which a character image CC (three character CCs) is displayed is started (FIG. 52 (A)).

After that, the sub-image display device 9051 rotates from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction (FIG. 52 (B)). At this time, the sub-image display device 9051 executes an effect in which the character CB jumps under the cliff G in accordance with the operation of the sub-image display device 9051 rotating from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction.

After that, in response to the sub-image display device 9051 turning sideways, the sub-image display device 9051 is notified that the sub-image display device 9051 has turned sideways by turning on the game effect lamp 909 provided on the sub-image display device 9051. The notification effect is executed (FIG. 52 (C)). Further, in response to the sub-image display device 9051 being turned sideways, an effect in which the character CB and the three character CCs fight is executed.

After that, for example, if the specific effect execution pattern TP1'-1 is determined in step S90910 of FIG. 43, the sub-image is corresponding to the elapse of "1000 ms" after the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways. The display device 9051 rotates from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction (FIG. 52 (D)). At this time, the sub-image display device 9051 executes an effect in which the character CB jumps onto the cliff G in accordance with the operation of the sub-image display device 9051 rotating from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction.

After that, in response to the sub-image display device 9051 being oriented vertically, an effect is executed in which the character CB emits a line of "Muri" (FIG. 52 (E)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, an example of an effect screen for the effect during development will be described.

For example, if the development effect pattern HP1'-2 is determined in step S90919 of FIG. 43, after the decorative symbol to be the reach loss combination is temporarily stopped (FIG. 53 (A)), the sub-image display device 9051 is second. The development time effect in which the character image (second character CD) is displayed is started (FIG. 53 (B)).

After that, in response to the sub-image display device 9051 rotating from the vertical direction to the diagonal direction, the effect of moving the second character CD from the sub-image display device 9051 to the image display device 905 is executed (FIG. 53 (C). )).

After that, the second character CD acts on the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the "left" decorative symbol display area 905L, and the effect of changing to another decorative symbol is executed (FIG. 53 (D)).

After that, the second character CD acts on the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display area 905R on the "right", and the effect of changing to another decorative symbol that is a reach combination is executed (FIG. 53 (E). )).

After that, the second character CD acts on the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C, and the effect of restarting the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C is executed. (Fig. 53 (F)).

In this way, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, and the development effect is completed according to the rotation of the sub-image display device 9051 from the diagonal direction to the vertical direction (FIG. 53 (G)). It develops from normal reach to super reach (Fig. 53 (H)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, an example of the effect screen of the hold change effect and the action effect will be described.

When the hold display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is "4", for example, if the hold change effect execution pattern HP6'-2 is determined in step S90678 of FIG. 37, the left in the area 905HA. The hold change effect is started with the hold display image T displayed at the fourth display position as a target (FIG. 54 (A)). At this time, the character image CE (character CE) is displayed on the sub-image display device 9051.

After that, at the start of the next variable display, when one hold display symbol is erased and the display position of the other hold display symbol shifts, the sub-image display device 9051 rotates from the vertical direction to the diagonal direction, and the character CE Aims at the hold display image T of the target and shoots an arrow Y (FIG. 54 (B)).

After that, since the arrow Y does not hit the hold display image T of the target and the hold display image T of the target does not change, this action effect becomes an action failure effect (FIG. 54 (C)).

After that, at the start of the next variable display, when one of the reserved display symbols is erased and the display position of the other reserved display symbol shifts, the sub-image display device 9051 rotates from the diagonal direction to the horizontal direction. , A notification effect is executed by turning on the game effect lamp 909 provided on the sub-image display device 9051 to notify that the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways (FIG. 54 (D)), and the action effect is produced again. Is executed, but this action effect also fails in the action effect, and the hold display image T of the target does not change (FIG. 54 (E)).

After that, at the start of the next variable display, when one hold display symbol is erased and the display position of the other hold display symbol shifts, the action effect is executed again (FIG. 54 (F)), and the arrow Y is the target. Since the hold display image T of the target is hit and the hold display image T of the target changes from white to red, this action effect is an action success effect (FIG. 54 (G)).

After that, the sub-image display device 9051 rotates from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction, and the hold change effect ends (FIG. 54 (H)).

Here, the game area includes a plurality of areas in which the area for hitting the game ball can be changed by the player's selection. The area on the left side is called the left game area, the area on the right side is called the right game area, and the game ball hit is either the left game area or the right game area, with the center of the game area in the left-right direction as the boundary. It is designed to enter.

Hitting a game ball aiming at the left game area so that the game ball flows to the left game area is called "left hit", and hitting the game ball aiming at the right game area so that the game ball flows to the right game area. Is called "right-handed". That is, the game ball hit by the player by hitting left or right jumps out into the game area. Then, the left-handed game ball flows down the left game area. On the other hand, the right-handed game ball flows down the right game area. In this way, the player changes the area for hitting the game ball according to the player's choice, such as right-handed or left-handed, by changing the firing intensity of the hitting ball launching device according to the amount of operation of the hitting ball operating handle. be able to. It should be noted that innumerable flow paths of the game ball flowing down the left game area and the right game area are assumed.

For example, when the special variable winning ball device 907 is provided in the right game area, the player should hit right in the big hit game state. Therefore, in response to the variable display result being a "big hit", the right-handed instruction image S for instructing right-handedness is displayed above the display area of the sub-image display device 9051 (FIG. 55 (A)). ..

Then, at the start of the round game in the jackpot game state, the right-handed instruction image S is displayed, and the speakers 908L and 908R perform a voice notification prompting the right-handed person (FIG. 55 (B)).

Here, the right-handed instruction image S is an image in which two arc-shaped arrow images are displayed around the character image "right-handed". The arrow image points in the clockwise direction and rotates clockwise around the text image. As a result, even if the sub-image display device 9051 rotates clockwise as shown in FIG. 55 (C), the sub-image display device 9051 rotates counterclockwise as shown in FIG. 55 (D). Even so, the player can identify what should be right-handed by rotating the arc-shaped arrow image pointing in the clockwise direction clockwise.

As shown in FIG. 55 (A), the right-angled instruction image S displayed above the display area when the sub-image display device 9051 is in portrait orientation is such that the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise. When the image is turned sideways, it is displayed on the right side of the display area as shown in FIG. 55 (C). As described above, even if the right-handed instruction image S instructing right-handedness is displayed on the right side of the display area of the sub-image display device 9051 that is oriented sideways, it does not cause misunderstanding of the player.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55A, the right-angled instruction image S displayed above the display area when the sub-image display device 9051 is in portrait orientation is 90 degrees counterclockwise by the sub-image display device 9051. When it is rotated and turned sideways, it is displayed on the left side of the display area as shown by a broken line in FIG. 55 (D). In this way, when the right-handed instruction image S instructing right-handedness is displayed on the left side of the display area of the sub-image display device 9051 that is oriented sideways, the right-handed person is instructed to hit right-handed. It may be misleading that left-handed strikes are instructed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the sub-image display device 9051 is vertically oriented and the right-handed instruction image S is displayed above the display area, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise. When the sub-image display device is turned sideways, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 55 (D), the sub-image display device is in the same position as when the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise. By moving the right-handed instruction image S to the right side of the display area of 9051, the player is not misunderstood.

As shown in FIG. 56, it is also possible to perform the effect of rotating the sub-image display device 9051 from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction and then rotating it in the vertical direction a plurality of times during one variable display. In the example shown in FIG. 56, when the jackpot game state is finished and the time saving state is controlled, the time saving control is being performed by rotating the sub-image display device 9051 from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. Notifying (FIG. 56 (A)). Then, when the specific effect is executed during the time reduction control, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction (FIGS. 56 (B) to 56 (C)), and then rotated from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. A specific effect is executed by moving it (FIGS. 56 (C) to 56 (E)). Then, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction according to the completion of the specific effect (FIGS. 56 (E) to 56 (F)). After that, in order to notify that the time reduction control is being performed again, the sub-image display device 9051 is rotated from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction (FIGS. 56 (F) to 56 (H)).

As shown in FIG. 57, the error notification image E for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the sub-image display device 9051 in response to the occurrence of the error. In that case, the display position of the error notification image E is a position where the entire error notification image E can be visually recognized without shifting the display position of the error notification image E when the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 changes. Even if a part of the error notification image E protrudes outside the display area of the sub-image display device 9051 and becomes invisible or difficult to see, the notification content by the error notification image E is set at a position where it can be specified.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and a part described in the above-described embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have the structure of.

(Modification 1) In the above embodiment, the sub-image display device 9051 that can be rotated in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the diagonal direction has been described. However, the display device is not limited to the above embodiment as long as it can be displaced to a plurality of states. For example, the sub-image display device 9051 may be movable to a first position and a second position above, below, to the right, and to the left of the first position. Further, the sub-image display device 9051 is composed of two first sub-image display devices 9051A and a second sub-image display device 9051B, and the first sub-image display device 9051A and the second sub-image display device 9051B are combined. It may be possible to displace the first state and the second state in which the first sub-image display device 9051A and the second sub-image display device 9051B are separated. Further, the image display device 905 may be displaceable in a plurality of states, or the image display device 905 and the sub-image display device 9051 may be displaceable in a plurality of states. According to such a configuration, it can be applied to various display devices.

(Modification 2) In the above embodiment, the character CB jumps under the cliff G in accordance with the operation of the sub-image display device 9051 rotating from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction, and the sub-image display device 9051 performs an effect. The effect of the character CB jumping onto the cliff G in accordance with the operation of rotating from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction has been described. However, the display device may display a predetermined image in relation to the operation of displacing from the first state to the second state, and display a specific image in relation to the operation of displacing from the second state to the first state. It is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, the aura of a predetermined character image increases in relation to the movement of the display device from the first state to the second state, and the display device becomes a predetermined movement in relation to the movement of the display device from the second state to the first state. The background image moves in the first direction in connection with the movement of the character image whose aura becomes smaller or the display device is displaced from the first state to the second state, and the display device is displaced from the second state to the first state. The background image may move in the second direction opposite to the first direction in relation to the operation. In this way, the predetermined image displayed in relation to the operation of the display device being displaced from the first state to the second state and the predetermined image displayed in relation to the operation of the display device being displaced from the second state to the first state are displayed. The specific image may be an image that is related to each other. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the effects associated with the displacement of the display device.

(Modification 3) In the above embodiment, the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is performed in connection with the operation in which the sub-image display device 9051 in the specific effect rotates from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction and then further rotates in the vertical direction. When the sub-image display device 9051 is in portrait orientation at the start of the specific effect, that is, at the start of the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", there is no dialogue of the predetermined character, and at the end of the specific effect, the sub-image display device 9051 Is described as being vertically oriented, that is, at the end of the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", the effect accompanied by the dialogue of a predetermined character is executed. However, in relation to the operation of the display device being displaced from the first state to the second state and then further displaced to the first state, the first state before the displacement to the second state and the post-displacement to the second state. It suffices if the mode of the effect is different from that of the first state, and is not limited to that of the above embodiment. For example, different effects may be displayed between the first state before the displacement to the second state and the first state after the displacement to the second state, or before the displacement to the second state. Different sound effects may be output between the first state and the first state after the displacement to the second state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the production accompanying the displacement of the display device.

(Modification 4) In the above embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect execution pattern has been described as being determined according to the period for maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 sideways, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, whether or not the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is executed and the number of pseudo-ream fluctuations are defined for each fluctuation pattern, and the variable display of the "pseudo-ream" is executed according to the fluctuation pattern determined on the main board 9011 side. When the above is specified, the period for maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 in landscape orientation may be determined according to the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations or the variable display time. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the setting associated with the execution of the specific effect on the effect control board 9012 side.

(Modification 5) In the above embodiment, as a specific effect, an effect of maintaining the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a specific effect, one that maintains the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 909, one that maintains the audio output mode of the speakers 908L and 908R, and one that maintains the display mode of a predetermined image displayed on the image display device 905. And so on. According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to various specific effects in which the mode of the effect is maintained.

(Modification 6) In the above-described embodiment, in the action effect, an effect in which a predetermined image hits the hold display image is defined as an action success effect, and an effect in which the predetermined image does not hit the hold display image is an action failure effect. However, "the predetermined image acts on the hold display image" is not limited to the one in which the predetermined image hits the hold display image. For example, both the action success effect and the action failure effect are effects in which an arrow shot by a predetermined character displayed on the sub-image display device 9051 hits the hold display image, but in the action failure effect, the hit arrow. The effect of being bounced or broken may be executed, and such an effect may not be executed in the action success effect. As described above, in the action effect, it is only necessary that the mode of the effect is different between the action success effect and the action failure effect, and the hold change effect is executed after the action effect to change the mode of the hold display image. It is assumed that the action effect is an action success effect, and it can be understood that the action effect is an action failure effect because the hold change effect is not executed after the action effect and the mode of the hold display image does not change. According to such a configuration, the production mode of the action production is not limited, and the interest of the action production can be improved.

(Modification 7) In the above embodiment, the first operation in which the direction of the sub-image display device 9051 is displaced from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction and the second operation in which the direction of the sub-image display device 9051 is displaced from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. However, the description is limited to what is executed as a series of operations in a specific effect. For example, as a first effect, an effect of displacing the display device from the first state to the second state is executed, and as a second effect different from the first effect, the display device is displaced from the second state to the first state. The first operation in which the display device is displaced from the first state to the second state and the second operation in which the display device is displaced from the second state to the first state are executed as a series of operations. It does not have to be. In that case, the jackpot expectation may be different depending on whether the second effect is executed after the first effect is executed or the second effect is executed after the first effect is executed. Good. According to such a configuration, even if the first operation and the second operation of the display device are not executed as a series of operations, the interest can be improved.

(Modification 8) In the above embodiment, the first operation in which the sub-image display device 9051 rotates counterclockwise to displace from the horizontal state and the sub-image display device 9051 are in the horizontal direction. Although the operation mode in which the first operation and the second operation are similar to each other, such as the second operation in which the first operation and the second operation are displaced clockwise and displaced in the vertical direction, has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the first operation, the display device is continuously displaced from the first state to the second state, and in the second operation, the display device is intermittently displaced from the second state to the first state. The first operation in which the device is displaced from the first state to the second state and the second operation in which the display device is displaced from the second state to the first state may be completely different operation modes. Further, one of a plurality of modes may be executed for each of the operation mode of the first operation and the operation mode of the second operation. In that case, which mode is the operation mode of the first operation, which mode is the operation mode of the second operation, or the combination of the operation mode of the first operation and the operation mode of the second operation. Depending on the situation, the jackpot expectation may be different. According to such a configuration, the operation of the display device can be attracted more attention and the interest can be improved.

(Modification 9) In the above embodiment, in the first operation in which the sub-image display device 9051 rotates counterclockwise from the vertical direction and is displaced to the horizontal state, an image of the character jumping under the cliff is displayed. In the second operation in which the sub-image display device 9051 is displayed and the sub-image display device 9051 rotates clockwise from the horizontal state to the vertical state, an image of the character jumping on a cliff is displayed. Not limited to this. A predetermined image displayed in connection with the first operation in which the display device is displaced from the first state to the second state and a second operation in which the display device is displaced from the second state to the first state are displayed. The specific image may be one in which an image of any one of a plurality of modes is displayed. In that case, which mode is the predetermined image displayed in connection with the first operation, which mode is the specific image displayed in relation to the second operation, or the mode of the predetermined image. The jackpot expectation may be different depending on the combination with the mode of the specific image. Further, as in the modified example 8, when the mode of the first operation or the mode of the second operation is any one of a plurality of modes, a predetermined image or a specific image is displayed according to the mode of the operation. The ratio of which mode may be different may be different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract more attention to a predetermined image or a specific image, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Modification 10) In the above embodiment, in the small symbol display area 9051V, a display mode that is common to all of the plurality of types of decorative symbols, for example, a symbol that indicates a number as well as a portion that indicates a number in the decorative symbol. In the above, the effect image showing a plurality of types of small symbols that can be identified by each is variably displayed as a broadcast information image, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation of the final decorative symbol that is the display result, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined reach mode, or a pseudo-ream of a special combination. Even if a decorative symbol or a special symbol such as "re", which is one of a plurality of types of loss combinations predetermined as a chance eye, is temporarily stopped and displayed, in the small symbol display area 9051V, an effect image showing the small symbol is reached. It is also possible to display the same as during high-speed fluctuation without using a pseudo-continuous chance eye or a special symbol. Then, when the fixed decorative symbol is derived, an effect image showing the small symbol may be displayed in a manner common to all of the fixed decorative symbols. That is, in the small symbol display area 9051V, the effect may be such that the player can grasp whether or not the variable display is being performed by the effect image showing the small symbol. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the variable display effect by the effect image showing the small symbol in the small symbol display area 9051V.

(Modification 11) In the above-described embodiment and Modification 1, for example, a display device composed of an LCD or the like is displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a large number of LEDs are arranged in a matrix. It can also be applied to an accessory that displays by LED, or an accessory called a versa writer that displays characters and figures with an afterimage of light by rotating or reciprocating LEDs arranged in a row. In that case, for example, taking a versa writer as an example, a predetermined image is displayed with an afterimage of light in relation to the first operation in which the versa writer is displaced from a stationary state to a rotating state at a predetermined rotation speed, and the versa writer has a predetermined rotation speed. A specific image may be displayed as an afterimage of light in relation to the second operation of shifting from the rotating state to the stationary state. As described above, the present invention is applicable not only to a display device composed of an LCD or the like, but also to a game machine provided with various display devices.

In the above embodiment, one variation pattern is used when the variable display is started in order to notify the effect control CPU 90120 of the variation pattern indicating the variable display mode such as the variable display time of the decorative symbol and the type of reach effect. An example of transmitting a designated command has been shown, but the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control CPU 90120 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, in the game control microcomputer 90100, as the first command, the presence or absence of variable display effects such as "slip" and "pseudo-ream", etc., are variable before reaching. A command indicating the display time and the variable display mode is transmitted, and as a second command, a command indicating the variable display time and the variable display mode after the reach, such as the type of reach and the presence or absence of the re-lottery effect, is transmitted. You may do so. In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable display time derived from the two commands. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 90100 notifies the variable display time by each of the two commands, and the effect control CPU 90120 selects the specific variable display mode to be executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or the second command may be sent after a predetermined time has passed after the first command was sent. You may try to do it. Further, the variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored and prepared in advance as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

The present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 901 but also to slot machines and the like. A slot machine is an arbitrary game machine capable of performing a predetermined game such as a variable display of a symbol serving as a plurality of types of identification information and imparting a predetermined game value based on the game result, and more specifically, the slot machine. 1. By setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, the game can be started, and the display result of the variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each is derived and displayed. This is a gaming machine in which one game is completed and a prize can be generated according to the display result. In such a slot machine, the features of the pachinko gaming machine 901 shown in the above embodiment by the cooperation of the hardware resources including the image display device of the slot machine and the software that performs a predetermined process. It suffices that it is configured to include all or part of.

In addition, various devices including the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the audio output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decorative LED. The effect operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the game machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but is based on the generation of a prize ball by enclosing the game ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives a score.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 901. , It may take the form of being distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

Further, in the above embodiment, "different proportions" is not limited to those having different proportions due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. It is a concept that includes those with different ratios due to the relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0%.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, there are a probability variation jackpot and a normal jackpot as the jackpot type, and based on the determination that the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot, a gaming machine that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot game is completed is shown. , Not limited to such gaming machines. For example, a special variable winning ball device provided with a predetermined probability variation region inside is provided, and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation region in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game. It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above embodiment to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

Further, in the above embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and decorative symbols of "1" to "8" are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown, but the variable display is such an embodiment. Not limited to. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol is derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, the update timing of each random number may be different, or the update range of each random number may be different so that the random numbers may not be synchronized.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main board 9011 stores the random value determination table, and the main board 9011 uses the random number value determination table based on the random values extracted from the main board 9011 at the time of starting winning. Although the reference is shown, an example in which the random value determination process is executed, the effect control board 9012 receives the determination result determined by the main board 9011, and the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed based on the received determination result is shown. , The execution mode of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the effect control board 9012 stores the table for determining the random number value, and the effect control board 9012 receives the random number value itself extracted from the main board 9011 from the main board 9011 and is based on the received random number value. The random value determination process may be executed with reference to the random value determination table, and the pre-reading advance notice effect may be executed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the random value determination process may be performed on the effect control board 9012. Further, the random value determination process may be performed on both the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. For example, the effect control board 9012 may receive a part of the random numbers and execute the random value determination process, and may also receive the determination result determined by the main board 9011. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 9012 receives a random value and determines whether or not it will be a big hit, and if it is a big hit, it executes a determination of the type of big hit, and the main board 9011 is based on the random value. The determination result of the variation pattern type determined in is may be received. That is, the effect control board 9012 can execute the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 9011.

Further, in the above embodiment, on the effect control board 9012 side, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. It was explained as. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command may be generated by an interrupt request by the first bit of serial communication.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is specified to maintain the mode of production. A period (secondary) for maintaining the first aspect as the specific effect, provided with a specific effect means capable of executing the effect (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing the specific effect that maintains the orientation of the sub-image display device 9051). It is possible to perform different effects between the period for maintaining the image display device 9051 in the vertical orientation and the period for maintaining the second aspect (the period for maintaining the sub-image display device 9051 in the horizontal orientation), and the second aspect is maintained. The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the length of the period (for example, the longer the time that the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways when the specific effect is executed, the higher the expectation of big hit. Is high, etc.). As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the period during which the mode of production is maintained.

Further, when the second aspect is maintained, it is easier to execute another effect with a high expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first aspect is maintained (for example,). Even if the count-up notice effect has the same number of counts by a predetermined character, the jackpot expectation of the count-up notice effect executed when the specific effect is executed and the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained sideways is It is higher than the jackpot expectation of the count-up notice effect that is executed when the sub-image display device 9051 is maintained in portrait orientation without executing the specific effect). As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation that the mode of the specific effect is controlled to the advantageous state by executing the other effect while the mode of the specific effect is maintained in the second aspect.

In addition, it is possible to execute a notification effect means for notifying that the mode of the specific effect has become the second aspect (for example, a notification effect for notifying that the sub-image display device 9051 is turned sideways). It is further provided with an effect control CPU 90120, etc.). This makes it easier to recognize that the mode of the specific effect has become the second mode.

Further, as the specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect that gradually changes from the first aspect to the second aspect in response to a plurality of variable displays (for example, the hold change effect execution pattern shown in FIG. 41). HP4'-1 to HP4'-2, HP5'-1 to HP5'-2, HP6'-1 to HP6'-2, HP7'-1 to HP7'-2, etc.). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest over a plurality of variable displays.

Further, a predetermined effect means capable of executing a plurality of predetermined effects (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 capable of executing a call advance notice effect) is further provided, and depending on which aspect of the predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined effect is executed. The ratio of the mode of the specific effect to the second mode is different (for example, when the call advance notice effect is executed and the call of the predetermined character is "I do not want to do it", the specific effect is executed. There is a high possibility that the sub-image display device 9051 will be turned sideways, etc.). As a result, it is possible to draw attention to a predetermined effect.

Further, during one variable display, it is possible to execute the effect of changing from the first aspect to the second aspect and then changing to the first aspect a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, a sub-image display). The effect of rotating the device 9051 from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction and then rotating the device 9051 in the vertical direction is executed a plurality of times during one variable display, etc.). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in one variable display.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A Special symbol display device 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Ordinary winning ball device 6B Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L Speaker 8R Speaker 9 Game effect Lamp 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Normal symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A Start port switch 22B Start port switch 23 Count switch 25A Hold display 25B Hold display 25C Hold display 60 Movable frame member 100 Game control microcomputer 101 ROM
102 RAM
103 CPU
104 Random number circuit 105 I / O
110 Switch circuit 111 Solenoid circuit 120 Production control CPU
121 ROM
122 RAM
123 Display control unit 124 Random number circuit 125 I / O
SU1 1st stage SU2 2nd stage SU3 3rd stage 901 Pachinko game machine 902 Game board 903 Game machine frame 904A Special symbol display device 904B Special symbol display device 905 Image display device 906A Normal winning ball device 906B Normal variable winning ball device 907 Special variable winning ball device 908L Speaker 908R Speaker 909 Game effect lamp 9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9013 Voice control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9020 Normal design display 9021 Gate switch 9022A First start port Switch 9022B Second start port Switch 9023 Count switch 90100 Game control microcomputer 90101 ROM
90102 RAM
90103 CPU
90104 Random number circuit 90105 I / O
90120 Production control CPU
90121 ROM
90122 RAM
90123 Display control unit 90124 Random number circuit 90125 I / O

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can play a game and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
The first display area and
The second display area and
A third display area between the first display area and the second display area,
A suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting an expectation degree controlled in the advantageous state by displaying in each of the first display area and the second display area.
A changing means capable of changing the ratio of the area of the first display area and the area of the second display area is provided.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the third display area is controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the plurality of display modes is used.
The changing means differs in the ratio of the area of the first display area and the area of the second display area depending on which of the plurality of types of display modes the display mode of the third display region is. Change to ratio,
The suggestion effect execution means
In the first display area, the first suggestion display of any one of a plurality of types of display modes is performed.
In the second display area, a second suggestion display of one of a plurality of types of display modes is performed.
The advantageous state depends on which of the plurality of types of the display mode of the first suggestion display is, and which of the plurality of types of the display mode of the second suggestion display is. The degree of expectation controlled by is different,
After the first suggestion display is performed in the first display area, the second suggestion display is performed in the second display area.
The display mode of the third display area changes to a display mode corresponding to the second suggestion display.
further,
A display means that can be displaced into multiple states and can display an image,
A specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect that maintains the state of the display means is provided.
As the specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect in which the period for maintaining the display means in the first state and the period for maintaining the display means in the second state are different.
A gaming machine characterized in that the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state differs depending on the length of the period for maintaining the second state.